Sie sind auf Seite 1von 362

1 Short-form

2 MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76


3 BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76

TETRA 4 BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76


5 BS Base Station ver. 7.76 2
O&M Program 6 API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76
7 TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73
8 TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74
9 PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00
10 PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00
11 TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00
12 OM program 2001
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Licensed user:
Damm Cellular Systems A/S 25
26
27
Damm Cellular Systems A/S
Mllegade 68 28
DK-6400 Snderborg,
Denmark. 29
Phone: +45 74423500
FAX: +45 74423330 30
Internet: www.damm.dk
E-mail: damm@damm.dk 31
Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

Functional Description

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 1 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

Address selection
A ADDRESS SELECTION

A Display Address selection


Displays selected address for nn commands
A

AP Select PS421 Address


Deselected again by selecting any other nn command address
NB: Only available on BSC421 if if PS421 is configured!
AP

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 2 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

General commands
M00 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION

M00 Display Welcome Message


M00

M00/A Display all software versions numbers


M00/A

M00/C Display compiler options


M00/C

M00/OM Display OM TCP Connection status


M00/OM

Command description:

M01 DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

M01 Display Description


M01

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 3 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

Alarms
M03 ALARMS

M03 Display Alarm Ports


NB: Command not available on PC Hardware
M03

M03/OUT/n Manual Alarm Level Output Control


Activates Manual Alarm Control of Alarm Output 1 + 2
Level Out2 Out1
----- ---- ----
L0: Off Off
L1: Off On
L2: On Off
L3: On On
Individual L1, L2 and L3 Alarms can be achieved by wiring of two external
relays:
K1A K1B K2A K2B
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

L1 L2 L3

NB: Remember to disable Manual Control again with M03/OUT/- command!


Alarm Level (0..3)

M03/OUT/.

M03/OUT/- Stop Manual Alarm Output Control


M03/OUT/-

M03/LED Display LEDs


NB: Command not available on PC Hardware
M03/LED

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 4 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

Network Settings
M06 DISPLAY NETWORK PARAMETERS

M06 Display Network parameters


M06

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 5 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

Date/Time
M07 DISPLAY DATE AND TIME

M07 Display date and time


M07

M07/S Display date/time status


M07/S

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 6 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

PS421 Status
M16 PS421 STATUS

M16 Display PS421 Status


Displays status of the local connected PS421
NB: Only available on BSC421 if if PS421 is configured!
M16

M16/AL Display PS421 Alarm Flags


Displays Alarm Flags for the local connected PS421
NB: Only available on BSC421 if if PS421 is configured!
M16/AL

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 7 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

Debug Queue/File
M46 DEBUG QUEUE/FILE

M46 Display Debug Queue/File status


M46

M46/C Clear Debug Queue


M46/C

M46/S Save Debug Queue in File


Debug is save in ...\Data\Debug.txt
M46/S

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 8 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

GUI OM Command
M50 GUI OM COMMAND

M50 Display Last GUI OM Command/Response


To be used for Software development only
M50

M50/cc..c Execute GUI OM Command


Writes the OM Command to the GUI Shared Memory.
Multicommands separated with the '|' character are supported.
As '|' however can not been sent as it will be interpreted of the OM Program,
the character '^' shall be used instead. The OM F50 command interpreter will
modify
'^' to '|' before it is written.
To be used for Software development only
OM Command

M50/.........................................................................

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 9 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

CPLD
M62 CPLD

M62 Display CPLD Version


M62

M62/HWSIG Display CPLD Hardware Signature


M62/HWSIG

M62/RAM Read CPLD Test RAM


M62/RAM

M62/RAM/hhhh Write/Read CPLD Test RAM


Value to write (0000..hhhh hex)

M62/RAM/....

M62/INPORT Display Input Port


M62/INPORT

M62/ALPORT Display Alarm Port


M62/ALPORT

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 10 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

CPU load
M66 CPU LOAD COMMAND

M66 Display CPU load


M66

M66/C Clear CPU Load Peak Hold


M66/C

M66/T Display 1msec. Timer


M66/T

M66/Q Display QPC Timer


M66/Q

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 11 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

PS421 Program Download


M68 PS421 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

M68 Display Program Download Status


M68

M68/PS421 Display PS421 Program Download Status


NB: Command only available with BSC421 Hardware
M68/PS421

M68/PS421/+ Start PS421 Program Download


1) Reads ...\PGM\PS421\PS421.HEX file from disk
2) Sends 68/BOOT command to PS421 to restart in boot mode
3) Dowloads Hex Records to PS421
4) Restarts PS421 again
NB: Boot Part of PS421 software is NOT updated.
Boot version can be displayed with the PS421 '68' command.
NB: Command only available with BSC421 Hardware
M68/PS421/+

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 12 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

I/O Memory
M69 I/O MEMORY

M69 Display I/O Memory Configuration


M69

M69/hhhh/1 Read I/O Memory Byte


Address Offset (0000..hhhh hex)

M69/..../1

M69/hhhh/2 Read I/O Memory 16-bit word


Address Offset (0000..hhhh hex)

M69/..../2

M69/hhhh/hh Write I/O Memory Byte


Address Offset (0000..hhhh hex)
Value to write (00..FF hex)

M69/..../..

M69/hhhh/hhhh Write I/O Memory 16-bit word


Address Offset (0000..hhhh hex)
Value to write (0000..FFFF hex)

M69/..../....

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 13 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

System configuration
M70 MAIN CONFIGURATION

M70 Display last File Save result


M70

M70/SAVE Save Main Configuration


Note that Main Configuration changes are saved automatically
M70/SAVE

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 14 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

Main configurations
M71 Display Main Configuration
M71

M71/DESCR/cc..c Change description


Desctiption

M71/DESCR/...............................

M71/IPADDR/ccc/... Change IP address


Note, that it shall match the IP Address for an Ethernet adapter.
LAN: LAN Local Address
WAN: WAN Local Address
IP address (000..255 in each field)

M71/IPADDR/.../...............

M71/POS/GPS/s Change Position update from GPS


Position update from GPS
+: Allow GPS to update position (default)
-: GPS not allowed to change position

M71/POS/GPS/.

M71/POS/... Change Position


Default position when no GPS signal is received.
Shall be setup only, when no GPS antenna is attached to either a connected
BS421
or the BSC412.
Parameter is overwritten, when a valid GPS position is received.
Latitude degree (00..89)
Latitude minutes (00..59)
Latitude seconds (00.00..59.99)
Latitude N/S (N or S)
Longitude degree (000..179)
Longitude minutes (00..59)
Longitude seconds (00.00..59.99)
Longitude E/W (E or W)

M71/POS/..:..:....../...:..:......

M71/GPSTIME/s Change Date/Time update from GPS


NB: Command only available with external BSS
GPS Date/Time update
+: Windows Date/Time updated from GPS
-: Windows Date/Time not updated from GPS

M71/GPSTIME/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 15 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

PS421 configuration
M76 Display PS421 Configuration
NB: Only available for BSC421!
M76

M76/PS421 Setup PS421 configuration


NB: Only available for BSC421!
M76/PS421

M76/REMOVE Remove PS configuration


NB: Only available for BSC421!
M76/REMOVE

M76/PSADDR/nn Change PS421 Address


NB: Only available for BSC421!
PS421 Address (11..47)

M76/PSADDR/..

M76/BSCn/... Change BSC IP address


IP Addresses of the BSC for PS421 status forwarding
1: BSC1
2: BSC2
IP address (000..255 in each field)

M76/BSC./...............

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 16 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

Factory configuration commands


M90 Display Factory Configuration status
M90

M90/FACTORYUNLOCK Select Factory Configuration unlock


UNLOCK

M90/FACTORY......

M90- Deselect Factory Configuration unlock


M90-

M90/SAVE Save Factory Configuration


Note, that all Factory Configuration changes
are saved automatically
M90/SAVE

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 17 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

Hardware Versions
M91 HARDWARE VERSIONS

M91 Display Hardware Versions


M91

M91/ITEM/cc..c Change item number


Item number

M91/ITEM/...............

M91/SER/cc..c Change serial number


Serial number

M91/SER/........

M91/VER/n.nn Change version number


Version number

M91/VER/....

M91/REV/n Change revision number


Revision number (00..99)

M91/REV/..

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 18 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

BSC412 Factory Configuration


M92 BSC412 FACTORY CONFIGURATION

M92 Display BSC412 Factory Configuration


M92

M92/GPSRX/c Change GPS RX type


GPS RX Type
3: iTrax03
6: IT600

M92/GPSRX/.

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 19 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

Restart Commands
M99 RESTART COMMANDS

M99 Display command function


M99

M99/STOP Stop BSC Service


Makes a normal shutdown of the service
NB: O&M connection will be lost!!!
NB: This requires a Remote Desktop connection to get the
BSC Service restarted!
M99/STOP

M99/RESTART Restart BSC service


Makes a restart of the BSC Service
1) Copy "Share" content from "Active"
2) Stop BSC Service
3) Copy BSC.exe to BSC..exe
4) Start BSC Service
NB: O&M connection will be lost!!!
M99/RESTART

M99/UPDATE/RESTART Restart BSC service with Update


Updates and Restarts BSC Service
1) Update "Active" with content of "Update"
2) Copy "Share" content from "Active"
3) Stop BSC Service
4) Copy BSC.exe to BSC..exe
5) Start BSC Service
NB: O&M connection will be lost!!!
M99/UPDATE/RESTART

M99/BACKUP/UPDATE/RESTART Restart BSC service with Backup and Update


Backup, Updates and Restarts BSC Service
1) Backup "Active" to "Backup"
2) Update "Active" with content of "Update"
3) Copy "Share" content from "Active"
4) Stop BSC Service
5) Copy BSC.exe to BSC..exe
6) Start BSC Service
NB: O&M connection will be lost!!!
M99/BACKUP/UPDATE/RESTART

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 20 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark MAIN BSC Main ver. 7.76 help

M99/RESTORE/RESTART Restart BSC service with Restore


Restores and Restarts BSC Service
1) Restores "Backup" to "Active"
2) Copy "Share" content from "Active"
3) Stop BSC Service
4) Copy BSC.exe to BSC..exe
5) Start BSC Service
NB: O&M connection will be lost!!!
M99/RESTORE/RESTART

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 21 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76 help

BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76 help

Functional Description
BSC421 LED description

LED's on top of BSC421 cover:

LED Color Marking Indication


--- ------ ----------- ------------------------------
D1 Yellow BSC POWER +5V BSC421 present
D2 Green BSC ACTIVE BSC is active (not standby)
D3 Red BSC NETWORK Network Alarm (fall-back mode)
D4 Red BSC BSS BSS Software Alarm
D5 Red BSC BSC BSC Software Alarm
D6 Red BSC ALARM BSC421 Alarm
D7 Yellow PS LINK PS421 Communication Link OK
D8 Green PS MAINS PS421 Mains Voltage OK
D9 Green PS CHARGE Battery Charge
D10 Red PS DISCH. Battery Discharge
D11 Red PS ALARM PS421 Alarm
D12 Yellow TR1 LINK TR1 Link OK
D13 Green TR1 ACTIVE TR1 Active (Tetra Mode)
D14 Red TR1 ALARM TR1 Alarm
D15 Yellow TR2 LINK TR2 Link OK
D16 Green TR2 ACTIVE TR2 Active (Tetra Mode)
D17 Red TR2 ALARM TR2 Alarm
D18 Yellow TR3 LINK TR3 Link OK
D19 Green TR3 ACTIVE TR3 Active (Tetra Mode)
D20 Red TR3 ALARM TR3 Alarm
D21 Yellow TR4 LINK TR4 Link OK
D22 Green TR4 ACTIVE TR4 Active (Tetra Mode)
D23 Red TR4 ALARM TR4 Alarm

BSC421 J31 + J32 connectors:

LED Color Marking Indication


--- ------ ------- --------------------------
J31 Green TR1 TR1 Ethernet Link/Activity
J31 Yellow TR2 TR2 Ethernet Link/Activity
J32 Green LAN LAN Ethernet Link/Activity
J32 Yellow WAN WAN Ethernet Link/Activity

J52 connector:

LED Color Indication


--- ------ ----------------------------
J52 Green LAN Ethernet Link Connection
J52 Yellow LAN Ethernet 100MBit

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 1 of 15


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76 help

General commands
F00 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION

F00 Display Software Version


F00

F00/BSC Display OM Red. BSC Connection status


F00/BSC

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 2 of 15


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76 help

BSC Activation Control


F02 BSC ACTIVATION CONTROL

F02 Display BSC Activation Status


F02

F02/ACTIVATE BSC Activation Request


Sends Activation Request to other BSC
F02/ACTIVATE

F02/STANDBY/s Change Forced BSC Standby


+: Forced Standby
-: Normal

F02/STANDBY/.

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 3 of 15


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76 help

Alarms
F03 ALARMS

F03 Display BS Alarm state


F03

F03/C Clear all BS alarms


F03/C

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 4 of 15


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76 help

Radio Cell Status


F13 RADIO CELL STATUS

F13 Display Radio Cell Status


F13

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 5 of 15


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76 help

Power Supply Status


F14 POWER SUPPLY STATUS

F14 Display Power Supply Status


F14

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 6 of 15


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76 help

TR Status
F15 TR STATUS

F15 Display TR Status


F15

F15/c Display TR Status


F: Frequencies/Power
P: GPS Positions
V: Versions
L: Frequency and Power Limits
E: External Alarms

F15/.

F15/nn/A Display TR Alarm Flags


TR Address (11..48)

F15/../A

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 7 of 15


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76 help

PS411 Status
F16 PS STATUS

F16 Display PS Status


F16

F16/nn Display PS Status


PS Address (11..47)

F16/..

F16/AL Display PS411 Alarm Flags


F16/AL

F16/REC Display PS411 Rectifier status


F16/REC

F16/OUT Display PS411 +14V/+26V status


F16/OUT

F16/LED Display PS411 LED status


F16/LED

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 8 of 15


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76 help

BSS Message test queue


F63 BSS MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

F63 Display BSS Link Status


F63

F63/N Display next BSS message


F63/N

F63/N+ Display next BSS message extended


F63/N+

F63/S Set BSS message test queue to start


F63/S

F63/C Clear BSS message test queue


F63/C

F63/s BSS Message suppression


+: Display all BSS messages
-: Suppress some BSS messages (default)

F63/.

F63/hh/hh..hh Send Message to BSS


Message ID (00..FF hex)
Payload (hex)
0 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

F63/../......................................................................

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 9 of 15


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76 help

UDP Message test queue


F64 UDP MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

F64 Display UDP Link Status


F64

F64/N Display next UDP message


F64/N

F64/N+ Display next UDP message extended


F64/N+

F64/S Set UDP message test queue to start


F64/S

F64/C Clear UDP message test queue


F64/C

F64/s UDP Message suppression


+: Display all UDP messages
-: Suppress some UDP messages (default)

F64/.

F64/hh/hh..hh Send Message to Redundant BSC


Message ID (00..FF hex)
Payload (hex)
0 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

F64/../......................................................................

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 10 of 15


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76 help

TR Message test queue


F65 TR MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

F65 Display TR Link Status


F65

F65/TCP Display TR TCP Connections


F65/TCP

F65/N Display next TR message


F65/N

F65/N+ Display next TR message extended


F65/N+

F65/S Set TR message test queue to start


F65/S

F65/C Clear TR message test queue


F65/C

F65/s TR Message suppression


+: Display all TR messages
-: Suppress some TR messages (default)

F65/.

F65/nn/hh/hh..hh Send Message to TR


TR Address (11..48)
Message ID (00..FF hex)
Payload (hex)
0 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
34


F65/../../.....................................................................
.

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 11 of 15


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76 help

BSC configuration
F70 BSC CONFIGURATION

F70 Display last File Save result


F70

F70/SAVE Save BSC Configuration


Note that BSC Configuration changes are saved automatically
F70/SAVE

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 12 of 15


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76 help

System configurations
F71 Display Common Configurations
F71

F71/CNFG/+ Activate BSC


F71/CNFG/+

F71/CNFG/- Deactivate BSC


F71/CNFG/-

F71/BSCNO/n Change BSC Number


BSC Number
1: BSC1
2: BSC2

F71/BSCNO/.

F71/REDBSC/s Change Redundant BSC Selection


+: Select Redundant BSC
-: Deselect Redundant BSC

F71/REDBSC/.

F71/REDBSC/... Change Redundant BSC IP Address


IP address (000..255 in each field)

F71/REDBSC/...............

F71/BSS/... Change BSS IP Address


NB: Command only available in OEM Base Stations
IP address (000..255 in each field)

F71/BSS/...............

F71/BSS/nnnnn Change BSS Remote Port


NB: Command only available in OEM Base Stations
IP Port (Default: 42395)

F71/BSS/.....

F71/BSS/c Change BSS Message Protocol


TCP Server is the default recommended protocol
NB: Command only available in OEM Base Stations
BSS Message Protocol
U: UDP
S: TCP Server (recommended)
C: TCP Client

F71/BSS/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 13 of 15


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76 help

TR Configuration
F75 Display TR Configuration
F75

F75/nn/TR412 Add TR412 Transceiver


TR Address (11..48)

F75/../TR412

F75/nn/TR421 Add TR421 Transceiver


TR Address (11..48)

F75/../TR421

F75/nn/REMOVE Remove TR
TR Address (11..48)

F75/../REMOVE

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 14 of 15


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSC Base Station Controller ver. 7.76 help

PS Configuration
F76 Display PS Configuration
F76

F76/nn/PS411 Add PS411 Power Supply


PS Address (11..47)

F76/../PS411

F76/nn/PS421 Add PS421 Power Supply


PS Address (11..47)

F76/../PS421

F76/nn/REMOVE Remove PS
PS Address (11..47)

F76/../REMOVE

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 15 of 15


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Software Versions:
S00 SOFTWARE VERSIONS

S00 Display software version


S00

S00/C Display BSS compiler options


S00/C

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 1 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

License Dongle:
S04 LICENSE DONGLE

S04 Display License Dongle Settings


Displays the settings read from dongle at application startup
NB: Only the Node BSC details are showed
S04

S04/I Display License Dongle Info


Displays the info read from dongle at application startup
S04/I

S04/D Display License Dongle Memory in Decimal


Displays the info read from dongle at application startup
S04/D

S04/H Display License Dongle Memory in Hex


Displays the info read from dongle at application startup
S04/H

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 2 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

System Nodes status:


S10 SYSTEM NODES STATUS

S10 Display Network Status


S10

S10/c.. Display Node Lists


Displays only first 30 BSC's
Displays only Active BSC's with function configured
List:
N : Nodes
NA : Node Alarms
NV : Node Versions
NC : Node Configuration
TRC: TR Configurations
TRO: TR Operational Use
L : Log Servers
S : Subscriber Registers
R : Tetra Cell
RC : Tetra Cell Configurations
RCN: Tetra Carrier Numbers
RNC: Tetra Neighbour Cells
V : Voice Gateways
P : Packet Data Gateways
A : Application Gateways
T : Terminal Gateways

S10/...

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 3 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S10/nnn/nn/s/c.. Display Node Lists


Displays only Active BSC's
First Node Number (001..NodeMax)
Max. number of Lines (1..50)
+: Display all BSC's
-: Display only active BSC's with function configured
List:
N : Nodes
NA : Node Alarms
NV : Node Versions
NC : Node Configuration
L : Log Servers
S : Subscriber Registers
R : Tetra Cells
RC : Tetra Cell Configurations
RCN: Tetra Carrier Numbers
RNC: Tetra Neighbour Cells
V : Voice Gateways
P : Packet Data Gateways
A : Application Gateways
T : Terminal Gateways

S10/.../.././...

S10/nnn/c/c.. Display one Node BSC


Node Number (001..NodeMax)
BSC:
A: Active BSC
1: BSC1
2: BSC2
Parameter:
N : Nodes
NI : Node Indicators
TR : TR Use
S : Subscriber Register
R : Tetra Cell
RCN: Tetra Carrier Numbers
RNC: Tetra Neighbour Cells
V : Voice Gateway
P : Packet Data Gateway
A : Application Gateway
T : Terminal Gateway

S10/..././...

S10/CLEAR Clear Node Message Sequence Error Counters


S10/CLEAR

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 4 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Log Server status:


S10/LS LOG SERVER STATUS

S10/LS Display Log Servers


S10/LS

S10/LS/c.. Display Log Server Lists


VER: Software Versions/Dates
IP : IP Addresses

S10/LS/...

S10/LS/CLEAR Clear Log Server Message Sequence Error Counters


S10/LS/CLEAR

S10/QUE Display Node Output Queues


S10/QUE

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 5 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Node Status:
S11 NODE STATUS

S11 Display Node Alarm Status


S11

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 6 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Tetra Cell Status:


S12 TETRA CELL STATUS

S12 Display Tetra Cell Status


S12

S12/CNT Display Tetra Timeslot Counts


S12/CNT

S12/TS Display Tetra Timeslot Status


S12/TS

S12/TS/cc/s Tetra Timeslot Operator Blocking/Deblocking


Device:
11..48: TR Address
QQ : Queue
Action:
+: Block Timeslot
-: Deblock Timeslot

S12/TS/../.

S12/TS/cc/n/s Tetra Timeslot Operator Blocking/Deblocking


Device:
11..48: TR Address
QQ : Queue
Timeslot Number (1..4 for TR, 1..2 for Queue)
Action:
+: Block Timeslot
-: Deblock Timeslot

S12/TS/.././.

S12/TR Display Tetra TR Status List


S12/TR

S12/NC Display Tetra Neighbour Cell List


S12/NC

S12/PD Display Tetra Packet Data Counters


S12/PD

S12/PD/C Clear Tetra Packet Data Counters


S12/PD/C

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 7 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S12/CCK/c Tetra CCK change request


Requests immediate update of CCK for all mobiles
with Air Interface Encryption.
The Key change is about 6 seconds after the command.
See also S12 command
CCK change request kind
U: Unannounced
A: Announced

S12/CCK/.

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 8 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Voice Gateway Status:


S13 VOICE GATEWAY STATUS

S13 Display Voice Gateway Status


S13

S13/L Display Voice Gateway Status List


S13/L

S13/nnn Display Voice Gateway Instance Status


Voice Gateway Instance Number (000..nnn)

S13/...

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 9 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Packet Data Gateway Status:


S14 PACKET DATA GATEWAY STATUS

S14 Display Packet Data Gateway Status


S14

S14/N Display Packet Data Gateway Counters


S14/N

S14/C Clear Packet Data Gateway Counters


S14/C

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 10 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Application Gateway Status:


S15 APPLICATION GATEWAY STATUS

S15 Display Application Gateway Status


S15

S15/L Display Application Gateway Connection List


S15/L

S15/IX/nnn Display Application Gateway Connection (Index)


Index (000..nnn)

S15/IX/...

S15/SSI/nnnnnnnn Display Application Gateway Instance (SSI)


SSI (00000001..16777215)

S15/SSI/........

S15/USERNO/nn..n Display Application Gateway Connection (User Number)


User Number (0..9999999)

S15/USERNO/.......

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 11 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Terminal Gateway Status:


S16 TERMINAL GATEWAY STATUS

S16 Display Terminal Gateway Status


S16

S16/L Display Terminal Gateway Connection List


S16/L

S16/IX/nnn Display Terminal Gateway Connection (Index)


Index (000..nnn)

S16/IX/...

S16/SSI/nnnnnnnn Display Terminal Gateway Connection (SSI)


SSI (00000001..16777215)

S16/SSI/........

S16/USERNO/nn..n Display Terminal Gateway Connection (User Number)


User Number (0..9999999)

S16/USERNO/.......

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 12 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

DMR Cell Status:


S17 DMR CELL STATUS

S17 Display DMR Cell Status


S17

S17/CNT Display DMR Timeslot Counts


S17/CNT

S17/TS Display DMR Timeslot Status


S17/TS

S17/TS/cc/s DMR Timeslot Operator Blocking/Deblocking


Device:
11..48: TR Address
QQ : Queue
Action:
+: Block Timeslot
-: Deblock Timeslot

S17/TS/../.

S17/TS/cc/n/s DMR Timeslot Operator Blocking/Deblocking


Device:
11..48: TR Address
QQ : Queue
Timeslot Number (1..4 for TR, 1..2 for Queue)
Action:
+: Block Timeslot
-: Deblock Timeslot

S17/TS/.././.

S17/TR Display DMR TR Status


S17/TR

S17/NC Display DMR Neighbour Cells


S17/NC

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 13 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Subscriber Register:
S20 Display Subscriber Register
S20

S20/S Display Subscriber Register Status


S20/S

S20/CNT Display Subscriber Register Counts


S20/CNT

S20/CKS Display Subscriber Register Checksums


S20/CKS

S20/DL Display Master Subscriber Register Download status


Displays the status of the Master Subscriber Register
S20/DL

S20/REG Display Subscriber Registration Update status


Displays status of Subscriber Registration Update
Runs on all active BSC's to send Registration status of all
registered SSI on this Node to other nodes.
S20/REG

S20/REG/+ Start Subscriber Registration Update


Used to manually start a complete update of all other Nodes
with registration information of regstered SSI's on this Node.
NB: Command is for test purposes only.
S20/REG/+

S20/TEI/nnn..n Find TEI Terminal Equipment Identity


TEI (15 digits 0..9, A..F)

S20/TEI/...............

S20/SIM/nnn..n Find SIM Card Identity


SIM (20 digits 0..9, A..F)

S20/SIM/....................

S20/SECSET Display Security Set Renew Status


Displays the status of Security Set renewal
NB: Requires Key Register active and Subscriber Register not in slave mode
S20/SECSET

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 14 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S20/SECSET/RENEW Start Security Set Renewal


Starts renewal of the Security Set for all Individual SSI.
The new Security Sets will be automatically replicated to all Nodes
1) If SIM is setup, SIM will be used for Key search
2) Else if TEI is setup, TEI will be used for Key search
3) Else no renewal is done
NB: Requires Key Register active and Subscriber Register not in slave mode
S20/SECSET/RENEW

S20/SAVE Save Subscriber Register to OM command file


Saved in "Subscr.txt" file in "Data" directory
S20/SAVE

S20/READ Read Subscriber Register from OM command file


Reads and executes "Subscr.txt" file in "Data" directory
Note, that it will add/change to the existing subscriber register.
The subscriber register can be cleaned before the read-in with the following
procedure:
1) Stop the BSC with Master Subscriber Register
2) Delete manually the files OrgV2.bin, ProfV2.bin and SubscrV2.bin
3) Restart the BSC
All Slaves will automatically be synchronized the the Master.
S20/READ

S20/CHECK Subscriber Register consistency check


S20/CHECK

S20/QUE Display Subscriber Register queues


S20/QUE

S20/TSICHAIN/nnnnnn Display TSI Chain List


NB: For debug only!
SubIx (000000..nnnnnn)

S20/TSICHAIN/......

S20/TSI/.../L Display TSI Chain List


NB: For debug only!
MCC (Mobile Country Code) (0001..1023)
MNC (Mobile Network Code) (0001..16383)
SSI (Short Subscriber Identity (0001..16777215)

S20/TSI/....:.....:......../L

S20/TSIIXTB Display TSI Index Table


NB: For debug only!
S20/TSIIXTB

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 15 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Profile Register:
S21 Display Profile Register Status
S21

S21/nnnn Display Profile


Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/....

S21/nnnn/L/snn/nn Display Profile list


Profile Number (0000..9999)
Line Offset (-50..+50)
Number of Lines (01..50)

S21/..../L/.../..

S21/nnnn/ADD/nnn/cc..c Add/Change Profile


The Home Organization number is used separate subscriber into isolated
organizations.
Note, that Home Organization value 0 has the special meaning "All" and is
intended to be used for e.g. the system operator.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Home Organization (000..999) (0=All)
Description

S21/..../ADD/.../........................

S21/nnnn/ASSORG Display Associated Organizations


Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../ASSORG

S21/nnnn/ASSORG/s Change use of Associated Organizations


Activates/deactivates the use of Associated Organizations
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Associated Organizations
+: Activate
-: Deactivate

S21/..../ASSORG/.

S21/nnnn/ASSORG/nnn/s Add/Remove Associated Organization


Maximum 16 Associated Organizations can setup
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Associated Organization Number (001..999)
Action
+: Add
-: Remove

S21/..../ASSORG/.../.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 16 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S21/nnnn/SSICALL/s Setup SSI Call Permission


Selects whether Individual Calls are allowed with SSI
If not selected, Individual Calls are only allowed wit User Number
Profile Number (0000..9999)
+: Allow Individual Calls with SSI
-: Only allow Individual Calls with User Number

S21/..../SSICALL/.

S21/nnnn/SSIGROUP/s Use SSI as Talking Party Identification for Group Calls


Selects the use of SSI as Talking Party Identification for Group Calls
to bypass the bug in certain mobiles (Motorola)
NB: This flag affects only GSSI's attached to the Profile (not ISSI)
Profile Number (0000..9999)
+: Use SSI as TPI for Group Call
-: Use User Number as TPI for Group Call (default)

S21/..../SSIGROUP/.

S21/nnnn/AUTH/s Change Authentication capability required flag


Profile Number (0000..9999)
+: Authentication capability required at registration
-: Authentication capability not required at registration
(default)

S21/..../AUTH/.

S21/nnnn/AIE/s Change Air Interface Encryption capability required flag


If the flag is set a check for match between the Profiles required TEAx
and the mobiles supported TEAx is done.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
+: Air Interface Encryption capability required at registration
-: Air Interface Encryption capability not required at
registration (default)

S21/..../AIE/.

S21/nnnn/E2EE/s Change End-To-End Encryption capability required flag


Profile Number (0000..9999)
+: End-To-End Encryption capability required at registration
-: End-To-End Encryption capability not required at
registration (default)

S21/..../E2EE/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 17 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S21/nnnn/SECMODE/n Setup Security Mode


For optional modes, service will be allowed without Authentication/Air
InterFace encryption, when no Security Set is available or when the SSI
Authentication and Air Interface Encryption disable flags are set.
For mandatory modes, service will only be permitted with full Authentication
and Air Interface Encryption.
Note, that Air Interface Encryption requires, that permission is activated
in the License Dongle.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Mode:
0: Class 1, no Auth./AIE
1: Class 1, Auth. optional, AIE none
2: Class 1, Auth. mandatory, AIE none
3: Class 3, Aut. optional, AIE optional
4: Class 3, Auth. mandatory, AIE mandatory

S21/..../SECMODE/.

S21/nnnn/SECKSG/nn Setup Key Stream Generator


Used with Air Interface Encryption only
Note, that the TR shall support the selected KSG.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
KSG:
00: TEA1
01: TEA2
02: TEA3
03: TEA4
04..15: Reserved

S21/..../SECKSG/..

S21/nnnn/SHORTNO/n/nn..n Setup Short Number Format


Specifies Short Number format
When a number with a length of 'Short Number Length' is dialled from the MS,
the 'Short Number Prefix' is automatically added before the lookup in the
Subscriber Register.
Leading zeroes in the Prefix are not significant.
The sum of 'Short Number Length' and the length of 'Short Number Prefix' may
not exceed 7 digits.
The function has no effect for PSTN calls.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Short Number Length (0..6) (0=Disabled)
Short Number Prefix ("" to "999999")

S21/..../SHORTNO/./......

S21/nnnn/DISPNO/nnnnnnn Setup Dispatcher User Number


User Number of the Dispatcher used to authorize calls
Leading zeroes are not significant
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Dispatcher User Number (1..9999999, blank or 0 for disabled)

S21/..../DISPNO/.......

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 18 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S21/nnnn/PRIORITY/nn Select Call Priority


Sets the Call Priority
This will overrule Call Priority request 1..14 from mobiles
Emergency Priority 15 and 16 from mobiles will always be passed unchanged
Mobile controlled Priority is default (see this command)
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Call Priority
01..05: Low Priority (PTT Priority=0)
06..11: High Priority (PTT Priority=1)
12..14: Pre-emptive Priority (PTT Priority=2)

S21/..../PRIORITY/..

S21/nnnn/PRIORITY/- Select Mobile controlled Call Priority


Lets the mobile control the Call and PTT Priority
This is the default setting
Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../PRIORITY/-

S21/nnnn/INDIVTIMEOUT/nn.n Set Individual PTT Call Inactivity Timeout


Sets the time from last PTT released until Individual PTT Call termination.
Default setting is Disabled.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Individuel PTT Call Inactivity timeout
00.0 : Disabled
00.1..25.0: Timeout value [minutes]

S21/..../INDIVTIMEOUT/....

S21/nnnn/INDIVTIMEOUT/- Disable Individual PTT Call Inactivity Timeout


Disables timeout of Individual PTT Call.
This is the default setting.
Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../INDIVTIMEOUT/-

S21/nnnn/CALLDURMAX/nnn Set max. Call Duration


Sets the maximum call duration of Individual Calls.
The default value is infinity (see this command)
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Max Call Duration (001..250 minutes)

S21/..../CALLDURMAX/...

S21/nnnn/CALLDURMAX/- Set Call Duration limit to infinity


Sets the maximum call duration of Individual Calls to infinity.
This is the default setting
Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../CALLDURMAX/-

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 19 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S21/nnnn/PTTDURMAX/nnn Set max. PTT Duration


Sets the maximun talking period at Simplex Calls
The default value is disabled (Mobile controlled) (see this command)
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Max PTT Duration (002..250 seconds)

S21/..../PTTDURMAX/...

S21/nnnn/PTTDURMAX/- Disable PTT Duration limit


Sets the maximun talking period at Simplex Calls to be controlled
of the Mobile.
The system will still limit the time to maximum 310 seconds,
which is longer than the maximum 300 second setting for the mobile.
This is the default setting.
Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../PTTDURMAX/-

S21/nnnn/LATEENTRY/nn Set Late Entry Timer


Sets the Late Entry Timer.
Controls the duraton between active Group announcements on
the Control Channel.
The default value is 15 seconds.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Late Entry Timer (01..60 seconds)

S21/..../LATEENTRY/..

S21/nnnn/LATEENTRY/- Disable Late Entry Timer


Disables Late Entry Timer.
Stops the active Group announcements on the Control Channel.
Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../LATEENTRY/-

S21/nnnn/SCCH/- Select Auto SCCH allocation


Selects automatic allocation SCCH's on BS.
The actually used Timeslot for Control Channel
depends on the number of SCCH's setup on the
BS Main Carrier.
Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../SCCH/-

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 20 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S21/nnnn/SCCH/nn Select Manual SCCH allocation


Selects manually allocation of SCCH's on BS.
The actually used Timeslot for Control Channel
depends on the number of SCCH's setup on the
BS Main Carrier.
MCCH only One SCCH Two SCCH Three SCCH
---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
00: TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH)
01: TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1) TS2(SCCH1) TS2(SCCH1)
02: TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH) TS3(SCCH2) TS3(SCCH2)
03: TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1) TS1(MCCH) TS4(SCCH3)
04: TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1) TS1(MCCH)
05: TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1) TS3(SCCH2) TS2(SCCH1)
06: TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH) TS3(SCCH2)
07: TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1) TS2(SCCH1) TS4(SCCH3)
08: TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH) TS3(SCCH2) TS1(MCCH)
09: TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1) TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1)
10: TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1) TS3(SCCH2)
11: TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1) TS3(SCCH2) TS4(SCCH3)
Profile Number (0000..9999)
SCCH Allocation (00..11)

S21/..../SCCH/..

S21/nnnn/PD/MS/nn/nnn Change PD Channel Mobile allocation


Changes the way Mobiles are allocated to Packed Data Channels.
Mobiles only share a PD Channel with Mobiles of same Class.
Class 00 does not allow sharing, but allows use of multi-slot PD Channels.
Class 01..99 allows sharing up to the max number of Mobiles on a single-slot
PDCH.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Class:
00 : Default (No PD Channel sharing, multi- or single-
slot)
01..99: Class of sharing Mobiles (PD Channel sharing,
single-slot only)
Max. no. of Mobiles sharing a PD Channel (001..100)

S21/..../PD/MS/../...

S21/nnnn/PD/TIMER/nnn Change PD Channel Ready Timer


Changes the Ready Timer for the Packed Data Channel
Can increase the Ready Timer for e.g. SCADA systems
Default: 5 sec.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Ready Timer (005..250 sec.)

S21/..../PD/TIMER/...

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 21 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S21/nnnn/CLASS/M Setup Subscriber Class Mobile controlled


See also Subscriber Class in Node configuration
Mobile controlled is the default setting
Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../CLASS/M

S21/nnnn/CLASS/ss... Setup Subscriber Class Network controlled


Note, that all - means Mobile controlled
See also Subscriber Class in Node configuration
Mobile controlled is the default setting
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Class 1 (+,-)
Class 2 (+,-)
Class 3 (+,-)
Class 4 (+,-)
Class 5 (+,-)
Class 6 (+,-)
Class 7 (+,-)
Class 8 (+,-)
Class 9 (+,-)
Class 10 (+,-)
Class 11 (+,-)
Class 12 (+,-)
Class 13 (+,-)
Class 14 (+,-)
Class 15 (+,-)
Class 16 (+,-)
1234567890122456

S21/..../CLASS/................

S21/nnnn/SERVRESTR Display SSI Service Restrictions


Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../SERVRESTR

S21/nnnn/SERVRESTR/s Change SSI Service Restriction activation


Selects activation/deactivation of all SSI Service Restrictions
Profile Number (0000..9999)
+: Restrictions active according to individual flags
-: All Restrictions disabled (default)

S21/..../SERVRESTR/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 22 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/c Display Service Permission flags


Profile Number (0000..9999)
SSI Kind
M: Mobile SSI
D: Dial-In SSI
A: Application SSI
T: Terminal SSI

S21/..../SERVPERM/.

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/M/nn/c Change Mobile SSI Service Permission flag


NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be
significant.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Mobile SSI Permission Flag Number (00..15)
00: Individual Duplex Call to Mobile
01: Individual Duplex Call from Mobile
02: Individual Simplex Call to Mobile
03: Individual Simplex Call from Mobile
04: Individual Call to Voice Gateway
05: Individual Call from Voice Gateway
06: Individual Call to Application Gateway
07: Individual Call from Application Gateway
08: Group Call
09: Send SDS
10: Receive Individual SDS
11: Packet Data Call
12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway
13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway
Flag
+: Service allowed
A: Service allowed with Dispatcher Authorization
(00..07 and 12..13 only)
-: Service not allowed

S21/..../SERVPERM/M/../.

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/D/nn/s Change Dial-In SSI Service Permission flag


NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be
significant.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Dial-In SSI Permission Flag Number (00..15)
06: Group Call
Flag
+: Service allowed
-: Service not allowed

S21/..../SERVPERM/D/../.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 23 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/A/nn/s Change Application SSI Service Permission flag


NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be
significant.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Application SSI Permission Flag Number (00..15)
00: Individual Call to Mobile
01: Individual Call from Mobile
02: Individual Call to Voice Gateway
03: Individual Call from Voice Gateway
04: Individual Call to Application Gateway
05: Individual Call from Application Gateway
06: Group Call
07: Send SDS
08: Receive Individual SDS
12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway
13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway
Flag
+: Service allowed
-: Service not allowed

S21/..../SERVPERM/A/../.

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/T/nn/s Change Terminal SSI Service Permission flag


NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be
significant.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Terminal SSI Permission Flag Number (00..15)
00: Individual Call to Mobile
01: Individual Call from Mobile
02: Individual Call to Voice Gateway
03: Individual Call from Voice Gateway
04: Individual Call to Application Gateway
05: Individual Call from Application Gateway
06: Group Call
07: Send SDS
08: Receive Individual SDS
12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway
13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway
Flag
+: Service allowed
-: Service not allowed

S21/..../SERVPERM/T/../.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 24 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/M/cc..c Change all Mobile SSI Service Permission flags


NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be
significant.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Mobile SSI Service Permission Flags:
+: Service allowed
A: Service allowed with Dispatcher Authorization (00..07
and 12..13 only)
-: Service not allowed
00: Individual Duplex Call to Mobile
01: Individual Duplex Call from Mobile
02: Individual Simplex Call to Mobile
03: Individual Simplex Call from Mobile
04: Individual Call to Voice Gateway
05: Individual Call from Voice Gateway
06: Individual Call to Application Gateway
07: Individual Call from Application Gateway
08: Group Call
09: Send SDS
10: Receive Individual SDS
11: Packet Data Call
12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway
13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway
14: (Spare)
15: (Spare)

S21/..../SERVPERM/M/................

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/D/ss..s Change all Dial-In SSI Service Permission flags


NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be
significant.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Dial-In SSI Service Permission Flags:
+: Service allowed
-: Service not allowed
00: (Spare)
01: (Spare)
02: (Spare)
03: (Spare)
04: (Spare)
05: (Spare)
06: Group Call
07: (Spare)
08: (Spare)
09: (Spare)
10: (Spare)
11: (Spare)
12: (Spare)
13: (Spare)
14: (Spare)
15: (Spare)

S21/..../SERVPERM/D/................

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 25 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/A/ss..s Change all Application SSI Service Permission flags


NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be
significant.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Application SSI Service Permission Flags:
+: Service allowed
-: Service not allowed
00: Individual Call to Mobile
01: Individual Call from Mobile
02: Individual Call to Voice Gateway
03: Individual Call from Voice Gateway
04: Individual Call to Application Gateway
05: Individual Call from Application Gateway
06: Group Call
07: Send SDS
08: Receive Individual SDS
09: (Spare)
10: (Spare)
11: (Spare)
12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway
13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway
14: (Spare)
15: (Spare)

S21/..../SERVPERM/A/................

S21/nnnn/SERVPERM/T/ss..s Change all Terminal SSI Service Permission flags


NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be
significant.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Terminal SSI Service Permission Flags:
+: Service allowed
-: Service not allowed
00: Individual Call to Mobile
01: Individual Call from Mobile
02: Individual Call to Voice Gateway
03: Individual Call from Voice Gateway
04: Individual Call to Application Gateway
05: Individual Call from Application Gateway
06: Group Call
07: Send SDS
08: Receive Individual SDS
09: (Spare)
10: (Spare)
11: (Spare)
12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway
13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway
14: (Spare)
15: (Spare)

S21/..../SERVPERM/T/................

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 26 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S21/nnnn/GROUPRESTR/s Change Group Call Restriction


The flag restricts the Profiles Individual Subscribers to make Group Calls.
When the flag is cleared, the Profiles Individual Subscribers can make call to
all
Home and Associated Groups according to each Groups specific restriction.
When the flag is set the Profiles Individual Subscribers can only make call to
Groups
listed in the Group Permission table.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Individual Subscribers Group Call Restrictions:
-: Call allowed to all Groups, only limited by
the Groups specific restriction.
+: Call only allowed to Groups listed in the
Group Permission table.

S21/..../GROUPRESTR/.

S21/nnnn/GROUPPERM Display Group Permission table


Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../GROUPPERM

S21/nnnn/GROUPPERM/nnnnnnn/ADD/s Add/Change Group Permission table entry


The Group Permission Table is used to give Individual Subscribers permission
to make Groups call to specific Groups.
By default Individual Subscribers can make Group Call to all Groups belonging
to Home and Associated Organizations independent of the permission in this
table.
Group Calls for the the Profiles Individual Subscribers can be restricted in
two independet ways:
1) Profile restriction:
If the Group Restriction flag is set in the Profile, all the Profiles
Individual Subscribers can only make Group Calls to the Groups
included in this table.
2) Group restriction:
If the Group Restriction flag is set in the specific Group SSI,
Individual Subscribers can only call the Group if it is included
in this table.
A maximum of 16 permitted groups can be setup.
NB: Leading zeroes of the User Number are not significant
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Group User Number (0000001..9999999)
PTT Permission
+: PTT allowed
-: PTT not allowed
SDS Permission
+: SDS allowed to Group
-: SDS not allowed to Group

S21/..../GROUPPERM/......./ADD/./.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 27 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S21/nnnn/GROUPPERM/nnnnnnn/REM Remove Group Permission table entry


The Group Permission Table is used to give Individual Subscribers permission
to make Groups call to specific Groups.
By default Individual Subscribers can make Group Call to all Groups belonging
to Home and Associated Organizations independent of the permission in this
table.
Group Calls for the the Profiles Individual Subscribers can be restricted in
two independet ways:
1) Profile restriction:
If the Group Restriction flag is set in the Profile, all the Profiles
Individual Subscribers can only make Group Calls to the Groups
included in this table.
2) Group restriction:
If the Group Restriction flag is set in the specific Group SSI,
Individual Subscribers can only call the Group if it is included
in this table.
A maximum of 16 permitted groups can be setup.
NB: Leading zeroes of the User Number are not significant
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Group User Number (0000001..9999999)

S21/..../GROUPPERM/......./REM

S21/nnnn/CELL Display Radio Cell Restrictions


Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../CELL

S21/nnnn/CELL/s Activate/Deactivate Radio Cell Restrictions


Profile Number (0000..9999)
Radio Cell restrictions
+: Activate (Only permitted Radio Cells allowed)
-: Deactivate (All Radio Cells allowed)

S21/..../CELL/.

S21/nnnn/CELL/nnn/ss..s Setup Radio Cell Permissions


For Mobile SSI's the flag gives permission to the Tetra Mobile to register
and use the Radio Cell.
For Group SSI's the flag gives permission for the group to be setup in the
Radio Cell.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Node Number of first flag (000..999)
Permission Flag
+: Mobile or Group allowed in Radio Cell
-: Mobile or Group not allowed in Radio Cell

S21/..../CELL/.../..................................................

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 28 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S21/nnnn/VGNODE/n/nnn Setup Voice Gateway Node


Voice Gateway Nodes used of the Profile members.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
1: Primary Voice Gateway
2: Alternate Voice Gateway
Node Number (001..999, 000 for disabled)

S21/..../VGNODE/./...

S21/nnnn/PGNODE/n/nnn Setup Packet Data Gateway Node


Packet Date Gateway Nodes used of the Profile members.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
1: Primary Packet Data Gateway
2: Alternate Packet Data Gateway
Node Number (001..999, 000 for disabled)

S21/..../PGNODE/./...

S21/nnnn/POSUSERNO/n/nn..n Setup Position Destination User Number


Terminal Gateway sends Position Report to these Numbers
Profile Number (0000..9999)
1: Destination 1
2: Destination 2
User Number (1..9999999, blank or 0 for disabled)

S21/..../POSUSERNO/./.......

S21/nnnn/DNS/... Setup DNS Server IP Address


DNS Server IP Address given to the Mobile at DHCP Request
Profile Number (0000..9999)
IP Address (000..255 in each field)

S21/..../DNS/...............

S21/nnnn/STFWDUSERNO/... Setup Store/Forward Center User Number


User Number for the SDS Store/Forward Center.
If the MS requests a valid number, this will be used instead.
All SDS will be forwarded directly to the end destination, if no
valid S/F-Center address is available.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
1..9999999: User Number of Store/Forward Center.
Used if a valid number is not received from
the MS.
Setting up the S/F-Center number here is
recommended.
Blank : MS shall provide the Store/Forward Center
number.
- : Store/Forward Center never used (SDS send
directly).

S21/..../STFWDUSERNO/.......

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 29 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S21/nnnn/APPLSERVUSERNO/nn..n Setup Application Server User Number


User Number for the Application Server
Profile Number (0000..9999)
User Number (1..9999999, blank or 0 for none)

S21/..../APPLSERVUSERNO/.......

S21/nnnn/DEL Delete Profile


Profile Number (0000..9999)

S21/..../DEL

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 30 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Subscriber SSI Register:


S22 Display SSI Register Status
S22

S22/nnnnnnnn Display SSI


SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/........

S22/nnnnnnnn/L/snn/nn Display SSI list


First SSI (00000001..16777215)
Line Offset (-50..+50)
Number of Lines (01..45)

S22/......../L/.../..

S22/USER/nnnnnnn Display User Number


User Number (0000001..9999999)

S22/USER/.......

S22/USER/nnnnnnn/L/snn/nn Display User Number list


First User Number (0000001..9999999)
Line Offset (-50..+50)
Number of Lines (01..45)

S22/USER/......./L/.../..

S22/IP/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Display IP Address


Only LSB's are significant
Address will be masked with Subscriber IP Address Segment Mask
Subscriber IP Address Segment value is added when displayed
IP Address (000..255 in each field)

S22/IP/...............

S22/IP/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/L/snn/nn Display IP Address list


First IP Address (000..255 in each field)
Line Offset (-50..+50)
Number of Lines (01..45)

S22/IP/.............../L/.../..

S22/TSI/nnnn:nnnnn:nnnnnnnn Display TSI


MCC of TSI (0001..1023)
MNC of TSI (0001..16383)
SSI of TSI (0001..16777215)

S22/TSI/....:.....:........

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 31 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S22/nnnnnnnn/REG Display SSI Registration


SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../REG

S22/nnnnnnnn/REG/GROUP Display SSI Attached Groups


SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../REG/GROUP

S22/nnnnnnnn/ADD/c/... Add/Change SSI


User Number:
Leading zeroes are not significant
With all-zeroes User Number is disabled
IP Address:
Only LSB's are significant
Address will be masked with Subscriber IP Address Segment Mask
Subscriber IP Address Segment value is added when displayed
With all-zero significant bits IP Address is disabled
NB: The SSI cannot be setup if it already exists in a TSI with HomeMNI.
SSI of Mobile (00000001..16777215)
SSI Kind:
M: Mobile (Tetra)
R: DMR
Profile Number (0000..9999)
User Number (0000001..9999999)
IP address (000..255 in each field)

S22/......../ADD/./..../......./...............

S22/nnnnnnnn/ADD/c/... Add/Change SSI


User Number:
Leading zeroes are not significant
With all-zeroes User Number is disabled
SSI (00000001..16777215)
SSI Kind:
G: Group
E: Emergency
D: Dial-In
A: Application
T: Terminal
U: Unified
Profile Number (0000..9999)
User Number (0000001..9999999)

S22/......../ADD/./..../.......

S22/nnnnnnnn/DESCR/... Setup SSI Description


SSI (00000001..16777215)
Description

S22/......../DESCR/........................

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 32 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S22/nnnnnnnn/HIDE/s Hide in Phone Book


This command allows the SSI to be hided in the Phone Book.
It can e.g. be used to hide SSI's with the Presentation Number setup
to point to a Unified Number. In this way only the Unified Number
is displayed in the Phone Book.
It can also be used to hide e.g. a Group Bridge etc.
NB: When "display all" is selected in e.g. the Dispatcher, all hidden
numbers are displayed.
SSI (00000001..16777215)
-: Always display in Phone Book
+: Hide in Phone Book (if in hide-mode)

S22/......../HIDE/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/PRESNO/nnnnnnn Setup Presentation Number


This command changes the presented number for outgoing calls.
It allows the Subscriber to present a different call-back number,
e.g. a Unified Number.
A call-back to the Unified Number will ensure all listed devices is
alerted.
NB: Only available for Mobile, DMR, Dial-In, Application and Terminal SSI.
NB: Leading zeroes are not significant.
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Presentation Number
0000001..9999999: Setup Presentation Number
0000000 : Clear Presentation Number

S22/......../PRESNO/.......

S22/nnnnnnnn/TSI/... Setup TSI


Note that if the MCC:MNC is equel to the HomeMNI, the TSI can only be setup
if an SSI with the TSI's SSI does not exist.
NB: Only available for Mobile and DMR SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
MCC (Mobile Country Code) (0001..1023)
MNC (Mobile Network Code) (0001..16383)
SSI (Short Subscriber Identity (0001..16777215)

S22/......../TSI/....:.....:........

S22/nnnnnnnn/TSI/- Clear TSI


NB: Only available for Mobile and DMR SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../TSI/-

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 33 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S22/nnnnnnnn/TRUST/c Change SSI Trust Kind


SSI (00000001..16777215)
N: Normal (fully trusted)
B: Blocked (no service)
V: Visitor (verified of SSI's Home Network)
U: Untrusted (auto-created)

S22/......../TRUST/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/PINCODE/cc..c Change PIN Code


PIN Code 1..9 digits, leading zeroes not significant
NB: Only available for DialIn, Application and Terminal SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
PIN Code:
1..999999999: Value
-: Disabled

S22/......../PINCODE/.........

S22/nnnnnnnn/TEI/... Setup TEI Terminal Equipment Identity


NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
TEI (15 hex digits 0..9 or A..F)

S22/......../TEI/...............

S22/nnnnnnnn/TEI/- Clear TEI Terminal Equipment Identity


NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../TEI/-

S22/nnnnnnnn/SIM/... Setup SIM ID


ID of SIM Card if present
Shall be cleared if not used
If SIM ID is setup, SIM ID is used to find K in Key Register,
else TEI is used.
NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
SIM ID (20 hex digits 0..9 or A..F)

S22/......../SIM/....................

S22/nnnnnnnn/SIM/- Clear SIM ID


NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../SIM/-

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 34 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S22/nnnnnnnn/AUTHDIS/s Change Mobile Authentication Disable Flag


Note, that Authentication disable is not possible in mandatory
modes selected in the Profile register.
NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Authentication Disable Flag
+: Disable Authentication
-: Authentication not disabled

S22/......../AUTHDIS/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/AIEDIS/s Change Air Interface Encryption Disable Flag


Note, that Air Interface Encryption disable is not possible in mandatory
mode selected in the Profile register.
NB: Only available for Mobile and Group SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Air Interface Encryption Disable Flag
+: Disable Air Interface Encryption
-: Air Interface Encryption not disabled

S22/......../AIEDIS/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/R Renew Security Set from Security Key


The Security Key will be search with the following references:
1) If SIM is setup, SIM will be used for Key search
2) Else if TEI is setup, TEI will be used for Key search
3) Else no renewal is done
NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../SECSET/R

S22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/... Setup Security Set


This command is for manual test only
Security set update should normally be done from Security Key
NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Status
U: Unencrypted
E: Encrypted
RS (20 hex digits)
KS (32 hex digits)

KS' (32 hex digits)


9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 4 3 21 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5
4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


S22/......../SECSET/./..................../................................/...
.............................

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 35 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/C Clear Security Set


NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../SECSET/C

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPTIMEOUT/nnnnn Set Group Call Inactivity Timeout


Changes the time from last PTT released until Group Call termination.
Default value is 5 seconds.
NB: Only available for Group SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Group Call Inactivity timeout (00000..65000
seconds)

S22/......../GROUPTIMEOUT/.....

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPNOKEYED/s Change Group Number Key-in permission


Allows the Group Number to be keyed in from the Keyboard.
When the MS makes a call with a Group Number, a PTP->PTMP Call Modification
will take place.
SSI (00000001..16777215)
-: Group Call via Keypad NOT allowed (default)
+: Group Call via Keypad allowed (PTP->PTMP)

S22/......../GROUPNOKEYED/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPOWNERSHIP/s Change Group Call Ownership


Controls the use of Group Ownership for Group Calls
SSI (00000001..16777215)
-: Group Call Ownership not used (default)
+: Group Call Ownership used

S22/......../GROUPOWNERSHIP/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPTEXT/cc..c Setup Group Text Line


Group Text Line to show on the Terminal Screen
NB: Only available for Group SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Group Text Line

S22/......../GROUPTEXT/...............

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 36 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPRESTR/s Setup Group Call Restriction


Flag to restrict access to the Group.
When the flag is cleared the Group can be called from all Individual
Subscribers according to their Profiles restriction.
When the flag is set the Group can only be called from Individual
Subscribers with the Group included in their Profiles Group Permission
table.
NB: Only available for Group SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Group Call Restriction:
-: Normal Group restriction
+: Call only allowed if Group is included in
the Subscribers Group Permission table.

S22/......../GROUPRESTR/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL Display Group Include Table


If the Group Include Table is enabled, a call to the group will also
include all Groups and Individuals in the Group Include Table.
NB: Only available for Group SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../GROUPINCL

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/s Enable/Disable Group Include Table


If the Group Include Table is enabled, a call to the group will also
include all Groups and Individuals in the Group Include Table.
NB: Only available for Group SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Group Table
+: Activate
-: Deactivate

S22/......../GROUPINCL/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/nnnnnnn/ADD/s Add/Change Group Include Table entry


If the Group Include Table is enabled, a call to the group will also
include all Groups and Individuals in the Group Include Table.
Note that leading zeroes of the User Number are not significant
NB: Only allowed for Group SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
User Number (0000001..9999999)
Pre-empt Flag
-: Do not pre-empt call if busy
+: Pre-empt call if busy

S22/......../GROUPINCL/......./ADD/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 37 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/nnnnnnn/REM Remove Group Include Table entry


If the Group Include Table is enabled, a call to the group will also
include all Groups and Individuals in the Group Include Table.
Note that leading zeroes of the User Number are not significant
NB: Only allowed for Group SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
User Number (0000001..9999999)

S22/......../GROUPINCL/......./REM

S22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRF/c Change Call Transfer


NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, DialIn and Terminal SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Call Transfer Type
-: None
R: Not Reachable (Weak) (Not registered/no radio
contact)
A: No Answer (Medium) (Incl. Not Reachable)
B: Busy (Strong) (Incl. No Answer and Not
Reachable)
U: Unconditional (Always) (Excluding Blocked SSI)
N: Number Change (Always) (Including Blocked SSI)

S22/......../CALLTRF/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRFNO/cc..c Change Call Transfer Number


NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, DialIn, Emergency and Terminal SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Number (0..9,#,*,+,p or w)

S22/......../CALLTRFNO/..............................

S22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRFTIME/nn Change Call Transfer delay time


Used to change the Alerting time before Call Transfer takes place
for "Call Transfer at no B-answer"
NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, DialIn and Terminal SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Time in seconds (05..60, default 30)

S22/......../CALLTRFTIME/..

S22/nnnnnnnn/SUBREG/s Change Subscriber Register change permission


NB: Only available for Application SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Subscriber Register changes from Application
+: Permitted
-: Not permitted

S22/......../SUBREG/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 38 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S22/nnnnnnnn/DISCREETLIST/s Change Discreet Listening permission


Controls the permission for Discreet Listening from the Application.
NB: Only available for Application SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Discreet Listening
+: Permitted
-: Not permitted

S22/......../DISCREETLIST/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/AMBIENCELIST/s Change Ambience Listening permission


Controls the permission for Ambience Listening from the Application.
NB: Only available for Application SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Ambience Listening
+: Permitted
-: Not permitted

S22/......../AMBIENCELIST/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/TEMPENDIS/s Change Temporary Mobile Enable/Disable permission


Controls the permission to make Temporary Enable/Disable of a Mobile
from the Application.
NB: Only available for Application SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Temporary Mobile Enable/Disable
+: Permitted
-: Not permitted

S22/......../TEMPENDIS/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/PERMDIS/s Change Permanent Mobile Disable permission


Controls the permission to make Permanant Disable of a Mobile from the
Application.
NB: Only available for Application SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Permanent Mobile Disable
+: Permitted
-: Not permitted

S22/......../PERMDIS/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPMAN/s Change Mobile Group Management permission


Controls the permission to change Group attachment and setup DGNA Groups
in Mobiles from the Application.
NB: Only available for Application SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Group Management
+: Permitted
-: Not permitted

S22/......../GROUPMAN/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 39 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S22/nnnnnnnn/NUMBERMOD/s Change Number Modification Permission


Gives permission for the Gateway to present an external provided
number instead of the SSI's User Number.
Shall be set if the SSI is e.g. a Group Bridge or similar.
NB: Only available for Application and Terminal SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Number Modification Permission
+: Number Modification allowed
-: Number Modification not allowed

S22/......../NUMBERMOD/.

S22/nnnnnnnn/EMERGPRI/nn Change Emergency Number Call Priority


Sets the Call Priority of an Emergency SSI
This will overrule Call Priority request 1..14 from mobiles
Emergency Priority 15 and 16 from mobiles will always be passed unchanged
Call Priority 15 (Emergency Call Priority) is recommended for Emergency Numbers
NB: Only available for Emergency SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Call Priority
00 : Mobile Controlled
01..05: Low Priority (PTT Priority=0)
06..11: High Priority (PTT Priority=1)
12..14: Pre-emptive Priority (PTT Priority=2)
15 : Emergency Call Priority

S22/......../EMERGPRI/..

S22/nnnnnnnn/ICON/nn Change Icon


Controls the icon displayed on Clients for a Unified SSI
NB: Only available for Unified SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Icon
00: Unified
01: Emergency
02: Personal
03: Multi
04: External
05: GSM
06: PABX

S22/......../ICON/..

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 40 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S22/nnnnnnnn/PRIORITY/nn Change Call Priority


Sets the Call Priority of a Unified SSI
This will overrule Call Priority request 1..14 from devices
Emergency Priority 15 and 16 from devices will always be passed unchanged
Call Priority 15 (Emergency Call Priority) is recommended for Emergency Numbers
NB: Only available for Unified SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Call Priority
00 : Device Controlled
01..05: Low Priority (PTT Priority=0)
06..11: High Priority (PTT Priority=1)
12..14: Pre-emptive Priority (PTT Priority=2)
15 : Emergency Call Priority

S22/......../PRIORITY/..

S22/nnnnnnnn/TARGET Display Target Table


NB: Command only available for Unified SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../TARGET

S22/nnnnnnnn/TARGET/n/s/s/s/nn/cc..c Add/Change/Remove Target


Add, Change or Remove a Target Number for the Unified SSI.
NB: Command only available for Unified SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Target Table index (0..7)
Voice Flag (+/-)
SDS Flag (+/-)
IP Flag (+/-)
Voice Call Delay Time (00..90 sec.)
Target Number (0..9,#,*,+,p or w)

S22/......../TARGET/././././../..............................

S22/nnnnnnnn/DEL Delete SSI


SSI (00000001..16777215)

S22/......../DEL

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 41 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Security Key Register:


S25 Display Key Register Status
S25

S25/T/hh..h Display TEI Key


TEI (Hex (0..9, A..F)

S25/T/...............

S25/S/hh..h Display SIM Key


SIM ID (Hex (0..9, A..F)

S25/S/....................

S25/I/nn..n Display SSI Key


SSI (00000001..16777215)

S25/I/........

S25/T/hhh..h/c/... Add/Change TEI Key


TEI (Hex 0..9, A..F)
Key Status
C: Clear Key (Encrypted at register save)
A: AES Encrypted Key (Saved unchanged in KeyV2
register)
S: Scrambled Key (Descrambled and Encrypted at
register save)
E: Encrypted Key (As saved in old Key register)
K key (Hex (0..9, A..F)

S25/T/..............././................................

S25/S/hhh..h/c/... Add/Change SIM Key


SIM ID (Hex 0..9, A..F)
Key Status
C: Clear Key (Encrypted at register save)
A: AES Encrypted Key (Saved unchanged in KeyV2
register)
S: Scrambled Key (Descrambled and Encrypted at
register save)
E: Encrypted Key (As saved in old Key register)
K key (Hex (0..9, A..F)

S25/S/...................././................................

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 42 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S25/I/nn..n/c/... Add/Change SSI Key


SSI (00000001..16777215)
Key Status
C: Clear Key (Encrypted at register save)
A: AES Encrypted Key (Saved unchanged in KeyV2 register)
S: Scrambled Key (Descrambled and Encrypted at register save)
E: Encrypted Key (As saved in old Key register)
K key (Hex (0..9, A..F)

S25/I/.......././................................

S25/T/hhh..h/DEL Delete TEI Key


TEI (Hex (0..9, A..F)

S25/T/.............../DEL

S25/S/hhh..h/DEL Delete SIM Key


SIM ID (Hex (0..9, A..F)

S25/S/..................../DEL

S25/I/nn..n/DEL Delete SSI Key


SSI (00000001..16777215)

S25/I/......../DEL

S25/RELOAD Reload Key File from Disk


Reloads the Key Register "Key.bin" file
NB: Register is cleared before the reload
S25/RELOAD

S25/SAVE Save Key Register in OM command file


Key Register saved in "Key.txt" file
S25/SAVE

S25/READ Read Key Register from OM command file


Reads the "Key.txt" OM Command file
NB: Makes Add/Change to the existing register content
S25/READ

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 43 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S25/IMPORT/cc..c Import Mobile Programmer File


1) Reads REF,K records into the Security Key Register
If REF is existing K is changed, else new REF,K set is added
2) Reads REF,ITSI records
Updates REF (TEI or SIM) in SSI Register if ITSI is existing
ITSI with zero or matching MCC and MNC is accepted
Deletes SIM if TEI is changed or TEI if SIM is changed
Coding:
REF(TEI)(19 Decimal digits): T0123456789012345678
REF(TEI)(15 Hex digits)....: T0x0123456789ABCDE
REF(SIM)(20 Hex digits)....: S0x0123456789ABCDEF0123
REF(SSI)(8 Decimal digits).: I01234567
K (32 Hex digits)..........: 0x0123456789ABCDEF0123456789ABCDEF
ITSI (15 Decimal digits....: 012345678901234
ITSI (12 Hex digits).......: 0x0123456789AB
Record examples:
TEI,K...: T0x000087171809780,0x0E4A01E34CBC5D53AD5D5DECCB11C0EA;
SIM,K...: S0x12345000087171809780,0x0E4A01E34CBC5D53AD5D5DECCB11C0EA;
SSI,K...: I01234567,0x0E4A01E34CBC5D53AD5D5DECCB11C0EA;
TEI,ITSI: T0x000087171809780,0x5DECCB11C0EA;
SIM,ITSI: S0x12345000087171809780,0x5DECCB11C0EA;
File Path + Name on connected BSC

S25/IMPORT/..................................................................

S25/QUE Display File Write Queue


File write queue for the "Key.bin" file
S25/QUE

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 44 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Organization Register:
S26 Display Organization Register Status
S26

S26/nnn Display Organization


Organization Number (000..999)

S26/...

S26/nnn/L/snn/nn Display Organization list


Organization Number (000..999)
Line Offset (-50..+50)
Number of Lines (01..50)

S26/.../L/.../..

S26/nnn/ADD/cc..c Add/Change Organization


NB: All ranges automatically set to full range for Organization 000
Organization Number (000..999)
Description

S26/.../ADD/........................

S26/nnn/PROFNO/... Change Profile Number range


Limits the Profile Numbers, which can be added via an Application Gateway
NB: Automatically set to full range for Organization 000
Organization Number (000..999)
Lowest permitted Profile Number (0000..9999)
Highest permitted Profile Number (0000..9999) (0=Barred)

S26/.../PROFNO/..../....

S26/nnn/SSI/... Change SSI range


Limits the SSIs, which can be added via an Application Gateway
NB: Automatically set to full range for Organization 000
Organization Number (000..999)
Lowest permitted SSI (00000001..16777215)
Highest permitted SSI (00000001..16777215) (0=Barred)

S26/.../SSI/......../........

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 45 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S26/nnn/USERNO/... Change User Number range


Limits the User Numbers, which can be added via an Application Gateway
Leading zeroes in User Numbers are not significant
NB: Automatically set to full range for Organization 000
Organization Number (000..999)
Lowest permitted User Number (0000001..9999999)
Highest permitted User Number (0000001..9999999)
(0=Barred)

S26/.../USERNO/......./.......

S26/nnn/IPADDR/... Change IP Address range


Limits the IP Addresses, which can be added via an Application Gateway
Subscriber IP Address Segment value is added when displayed
NB: Automatically set to full range for Organization 000
Organization Number (000..999)
Lowest permitted IP Address (000..255)
Highest permitted IP Address (000..255)
(0=Barred)

S26/.../IPADDR/.............../...............

S26/nnn/PUBLRESTR/s Change Publish Restriction flag


Restricts the publishing of the Organisation.
Setting this flag will hide the existence of the Organization for all except
Home Organization Applications.
Organization Number (000..999)
Publish Restriction flag
+: Publish to Home Organization Applications only
-: Publish to all Applications

S26/.../PUBLRESTR/.

S26/nnn/NODERESTR/s Change Node Status Restriction flag


Restricts the publishing of Node Status.
Setting this flag will hide the Node Status in Applications.
Organization Number (000..999)
Node Status Restriction flag
+: Node Status NOT sent to Applications
-: Node Status sent to Applications

S26/.../NODERESTR/.

S26/nnn/DEL Delete Organization


Organization Number (000..999)

S26/.../DEL

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 46 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Network Register:
S27 Display Network Register Status
S27

S27/L Display Network List


S27/L

S27/nnnn:nnnnn Display Network


MCC (0001..1023)(Mobile Country Code)
MNC (00001..16383)(Mobile Network Code)

S27/....:.....

S27/nnnn:nnnnn/L/snn/nn Display Network list


MCC (0001..1023)(Mobile Country Code)
MNC (00001..16383)(Mobile Network Code)
Line Offset (-50..+50)
Number of Lines (01..50)

S27/....:...../L/.../..

S27/nnnn:nnnnn/ADD/cc..c Add/Change Network


The Network Code 0000:00000 acts as "default" Network,
if the actual MNI (MCC:MNC) is not existing.
NB: Requires, that Networks is not restricted in License Dongle
MCC (0001..1023)(Mobile Country Code)
MNC (00001..16383)(Mobile Network Code)
Description

S27/....:...../ADD/........................

S27/nnnn:nnnnn/AUTO/c/ALLOW/s Change Autocreate Allowed Flag


NB: Requires, that AutoCreate is permitted in License Dongle
MCC (0001..1023)(Mobile Country Code)
MNC (00001..16383)(Mobile Network Code)
Kind:
G: Group
T: Tetra Mobile
AutoCreate Allow Flag:
+: Allow SSI AutoCreate
-: No SSI AutoCreate (default)

S27/....:...../AUTO/./ALLOW/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 47 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S27/nnnn:nnnnn/AUTO/c/PROFILE/nnnn Change Autocreate Profile Number


MCC (0001..1023)(Mobile Country Code)
MNC (00001..16383)(Mobile Network Code)
Kind:
G: Group
T: Tetra Mobile
Profile Number (0..9999)

S27/....:...../AUTO/./PROFILE/....

S27/nnnn:nnnnn/AUTO/c/SSITSI/s Change Autocreate SSI from TSI flag


MCC (0001..1023)(Mobile Country Code)
MNC (00001..16383)(Mobile Network Code)
Kind:
T: Tetra Mobile
SSI from TSI flag:
+: Setup SSI from TSI
-: Setup SSI from Organization range (default)

S27/....:...../AUTO/./SSITSI/.

S27/nnnn:nnnnn/AUTO/c/USERSSI/s Change Autocreate UserNo from SSI flag


MCC (0001..1023)(Mobile Country Code)
MNC (00001..16383)(Mobile Network Code)
Kind:
G: Group
T: Tetra Mobile
UserNo from SSI flag:
+: Set User Number to SSI value
-: Set User Number from Organization range
(default)

S27/....:...../AUTO/./USERSSI/.

S27/nnnn:nnnnn/AUTO/c/TIMEOUT/nnnnn Change Autocreate Timeout


MCC (0001..1023)(Mobile Country Code)
MNC (00001..16383)(Mobile Network Code)
Group Call Inactivity timeout (00000..65000sec)

S27/....:...../AUTO/G/TIMEOUT/.....

S27/nnnn:nnnn/DEL Delete Network


MCC (0001..1023)(Mobile Country Code)
MNC (00001..16383)(Mobile Network Code)

S27/....:...../DEL

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 48 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S27/AUTO/c/nnnn:nnnnn:nnnnnnnn Setup Autocreated TSI


NB: This command only for test purpose!
Kind
G: Group Autocreate
T: Tetra Mobile Autocreate
MCC (0001..1023)(Mobile Country Code)
MNC (00001..16383)(Mobile Network Code)
SSI (00000001..16777315)

S27/AUTO/c/....:.....:........

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 49 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Audio Messages
S30 AUDIO MESSAGES

S30 Display Audio Message status


The Audio Messages are Voice and Tone sequences used in the system as
Audio announcements.
They are read-in from .wav files located in the Audio directory.
Format shall be CCITT A-Law 8kHz 8-bit mono.
English versions are delivered from the factory as standard
Messages in different languages and with adjusted content can be
recorded with the Windows "Sound Recorder" tool.
When loaded from the files, versions coded as Tetra Voice are also
generated automatically.
S30

S30/R Reload Audio Messages from disk


Reads all .wav files in the Audio directory.
Tetra Audio versions are also generated automatically.
S30/R

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 50 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

TetraFlex Shares
S31 TETRAFLEX SHARES

S31 Display TetraFlex Shares


Displays the list of Version Dates in the TetraFlex share.
Automatically updated every 30 second.
S31

S31/nn Display TetraFlex Share


Share Number (00..nn)

S31/..

S31/nn/nnnn-nn-nn Change Version Date


Change File Date to the selected value
Used to set the Version Date to the correct one, if the has been
accidentially modified.
Time is set to 12:00:00 UTC
Note:
The command changes the Date of the file in the Share directory.
After execution, the file should be copied back to the Active directory.
This is needed in order to keep the Date change after a BSC restart.
Share Number (00..nn)
File Date (e.g. 2012-06-27)

S31/../....-..-..

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 51 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

InterNode OM Command
S50 INTERNODE OM COMMAND

S50 Display Command function


S50

S50/D Display last received OM Command/Response


S50/D

S50/ccc/cc..c Send OM Command to other Node(s)


See OM Help for available commands
Multicommands separated with the '|' character is supported.
As '|' however can not been send as it will be interpreted of the OM Program,
the character '^' shall be used instead. The OM S50 command interpreter will
modify
'^' to '|' before it is send.
Node number (ALL or 001..999)
OM Command String

S50/.../......................................................................

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 52 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Application Gateway Subscriber Register Command


S51 API SUBSCRIBER REGISTER COMMAND

S51 Display Command function


S51

S51/D Display last API Command/Response


S51/D

S51/nnnnnnnn/cc..c Execute API Command


The command simulates commands from the ApiDll to modify the Subscriber
Register.
Commands shall be entered in the ApiDll format ("21/..., 22/... and 26/...).
The Gateway will make syntax and permission check on the command, modify
it to the BSC format (S21/..., S22/... and S26/...) and send it to the
Master Subscriber Register Node.
See ApiDll Help for command syntax.
See also 20/QUE, 51/D and 51/... commands for the ApiDll.
See also S51/D for the Gateway Node.
See also S50/D and S20/QUE commands for the Master Subscriber Register Node.
SSI of of Application DLL (00000001..16777215)
Command String

S51/......../.................................................................

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 53 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Log Server Message test queue:


S64 LOG SERVER MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

S64 Display Log Server Connection Status


S64

S64/N Display next Log Server message


S64/N

S64/N+ Display next Log Server message extended


S64/N+

S64/S Set Log Server message test queue to start


S64/S

S64/C Clear Log Server message test queue


S64/C

S64/s Log Server Message suppression


+: Display all Log Server messages
-: Suppress some Log Server messages (default)

S64/.

S64/hh/hh..hh Send message to Home Log Servers


Message ID (hex)
Optional Parameters (hex)
02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

S64/../..................................................................

S64/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/hh/hh..hh Send message to Log Servers


IP multicast address (000..255 in each field)
Message ID (hex)
Optional Parameters (hex)
02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
28 30 32


S64/.............../../........................................................
..........

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 54 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Internode Control Message test queue:


S65 INTERNODE CONTROL MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

S65 Display Internode Connection status


S65

S65/N Display next Internode Control Message


S65/N

S65/N+ Display next Internode Control Message extended


S65/N+

S65/S Set Internode Control Message test queue to start


S65/S

S65/C Clear Internode Control Message test queue


S65/C

S65/s Internode Control Message suppression


+: Display all Internode Control messages
-: Suppress some Internode Control messages (default)

S65/.

S65/ALL/hh/hh..hh Send Control Message to all Nodes


Message ID (hex)
Optional Parameters (hex)
02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

S65/ALL/../..................................................................

S65/SD/hh/hh..hh Send Control Message to Subscriber Register Download Nodes


Message ID (hex)
Optional Parameters (hex)
02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

S65/SD/../..................................................................

S65/DL/hh/hh..hh Send Control Message to Discreet Listening Nodes


Message ID (hex)
Optional Parameters (hex)
02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

S65/DL/../..................................................................

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 55 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S65/nnn/hh/hh..hh Send Control Message to specific Node


Node Number (001..NodeMax)
Message ID (hex)
Optional Parameters (hex)
02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

S65/.../../..................................................................

S65/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/hh/hh..hh Send Control Message to specific IP Address


IP address (000..255 in each field)
Message ID (hex)
Optional Parameters (hex)
02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26

S65/.............../../......................................................

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 56 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

BSS Configuration Commands:


S70 Display last file save result
S70

S70/SAVE Save BSS Configuration


Note that BSS Configuration changes are saved automatically
S70/SAVE

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 57 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

General Node configuration:


S71 Display General Node configuration
S71

S71/NODENO/nnn Change Node Number


Max. node number is limited of:
a) Compile constant, see S00/C command
b) License Dongle, see S04 command
Node Number (001..nnn)

S71/NODENO/...

S71/IP/MCADDR/... Change Multicast Base IP Address


Defines the start address for the Multicast Address block
The entered address is truncated with a /28 mask
Used addresses (for default Base Address):
224.239.016.001: Main Internode Control Multicast Address
224.239.016.003: Discreet Listening Multicast Address
224.239.016.004: Subscriber Register Download Multicast Address
Default Base Address: 224.239.016.000
IP address (224.000.002.000..239.255.255.254)

S71/IP/MCADDR/...............

S71/IP/MCPORT/nnnnn Change Control Multicast Port Number


UDP Port Number for Multicast communication with other Nodes
Default Port Number is 42400
Multicast UDP Port (00000..65535)

S71/IP/MCPORT/.....

S71/IP/UCPORT/nnnnn Change Control Unicast Port Number


UDP Port Number for Unicast communication with other Nodes
Default Port Number is 42401
Unicast UDP Port (00000..65535)

S71/IP/UCPORT/.....

S71/IP/LOGADDR/... Change Log Multicast IP Address


IP Multicast Address for the Serving Log Servers
If more than one Log Server Group is used, change the last field
to the actual Log Server Group Number
Default Address is 224.239.017.001
IP address (224.000.002.000..239.255.255.254)

S71/IP/LOGADDR/...............

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 58 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S71/IP/LOGPORT/nnnnn Change Log UDP Port Number


UDP Port Number for Log Servers
Default Port Number is 42402
UDP Port (00000..65535)

S71/IP/LOGPORT/.....

S71/IP/CMOIPADDR/... Change CMoIP Multicast IP Address


Most significant bytes of IP Multicast Address for CMoIP
Default Address is 225.000.x.x
CMoIP IP address (225.000..239.255)

S71/IP/CMOIPADDR/.......

S71/MCC/nnnn Change Home Mobile Country Code


MCC part of the HomeMNI
NB: If the TSI count is not zero, this parameter should not be changed
without carefully analyzing the impact.
NB: After a change of Home MCC/MNC a restart of the whole system is
recommended!
Home MCC (0001..1023)

S71/MCC/....

S71/MNC/nnnnn Change Home Mobile Network Code


MNC part of the HomeMNI
NB: If the TSI count is not zero, this parameter should not be changed
without carefully analyzing the impact.
NB: After a change of Home MCC/MNC a restart of the whole system is
recommended!
Home MNC (0001..16383)

S71/MNC/.....

S71/NODETIMEOUT/nnnn Change Inter-node Timeout


Changes the timeout of responses from other Nodes.
Shall be at least 200 msec. larger than the peak roud-trip time to any Node.
Use Ping.exe to determine the actual round-trip time.
Note, that the last digit will be truncated to zero.
The default value is 500 msec.
Inter-node Timeout (0200..2550 [msec])

S71/NODETIMEOUT/....

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 59 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S71/MULTIVOCODER/s Change Multivocoder selection


Changes the function of the Vocoders for the Gateways
Disabled:
Core network uses always Tetra Coded Voice
Functionality as in TetraFlex before version 7.60
Enabled:
Core network uses several different Voice codings
Allows higher quality voice between Appl., Term. and Voice Gateways
Requirement:
1) Vocoders shall be present in BS/TR
2) Faster BS downlink IP connection (2048/512kbit/s for 4-carrier BS)
NB: This setting shall be the same on all Nodes in the system
Multivocoder
-: Disabled
+: Enabled

S71/MULTIVOCODER/.

S71/VOICEBUF/n Change Voice Buffer length


Changes the initial length of the Voice Elastic Buffer
This value is used to select a resonable balance between delay and slips.
Lower value gives lower average speech delay but more slips.
Higher value gives less slips but higher average speech delay.
Default value is 2 Voice Frames (2x60msec.)
A higher value can improve voice quality if the transmission network has
high jitter and/or End-to-End Encryption is used.
Initial Voice Buffer Length (1..5, default=2)

S71/VOICEBUF/.

S71/SUBIPADDR/... Change Subscriber IP Address Segment


IP Address Segment used for Mobiles for Packet Data
NB: The LSB of the Address is automatically cleared by the Mask
Default Address is 172.28.0.0/16
IP Address
Mask (12..30)

S71/SUBIPADDR/.............../..

S71/SUBMODE/c Change Subscriber Register Mode


Controls replication between Nodes/BSC's
A BSC set to Master is automatically running Slave when Standby
The two redundant BSC's shall have same setting
For single node systems with redundant BSC's, both shall be set to Master
Warning: Do only select Master Mode on one Node!
Subscriber Register Mode
-: Single (No update to/from other BSC's)
M: Master (Active BSC : Sends updates to all slave BSC's)
(Standby BSC: Gets update from Master, no changes)
S: Slave (Gets update from Master, no OM/NM changes)

S71/SUBMODE/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 60 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S71/KEYREG/s Key Register activation


Activates the Security Key Register function
NB: Shall only be activated on BSC's with Subscriber
Register in Single or Master mode
Key Register
+: Activation
-: Deactivation

S71/KEYREG/.

S71/SHARENAME/cc..c Share Name


Sets the Share Name for the File Share for updates for ApiDll, Dispatcher,
Clients etc.
Shall match the Share Name used for "Share" directory.
For a single-node PC the default value is "TetraFlex".
For a Multi-node PC the share for each Node shall be setup to be different.
Share Name

S71/SHARENAME/................................

S71/SHAREUSER/cc..c Share User


Sets the Share User Name for the File Share.
The User shall have Read access to the Share.
The default value is "Tetra".
Share User

S71/SHAREUSER/................................

S71/SHAREPASSWORD/cc..c Share Password


Sets the Share Password for the File Share User.
The default value is "Tetra".
Share Password

S71/SHAREPASSWORD/................................

S71/SNMP/c SNMP Mode


Controls the SNMP functionality on the BSC
SNMP Mode
-: SNMP disabled (default)
+: SNMP report from this BSC only
A: SNMP report from all BSC's

S71/SNMP/.

S71/TR Display TR Use


S71/TR

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 61 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S71/TR/nn/s Change TR Use


TR Address (11..48)
TR Use:
-: Unused
T: Tetra
D: DMR
S: Spare

S71/TR/../.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 62 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Tetra Cell Configuration:


S72 Display Tetra Cell configuration
S72

S72/CNFG/+ Activate Tetra Cell


Only possible if allowed of License Dongle
S72/CNFG/+

S72/CNFG/- Deactivate Tetra Cell


S72/CNFG/-

S72/BSPWR/+nn.n Change Tetra BS Output Power


Command used set the Tetra BS Antenna Tetra carrier output power
at un-activated Power Reduction.
Available range:
BS421 : +27.0 to +40.0 dBm
TR412 : +26.0 to +40.0 dBm
TR412H: +30.0 to +44.0 dBm
If the value is lower or higher than the permitted range, the minimum
or maximum power respectively will be set.
NB: This setting controls the Antenna Power, when Power Reduction in not
activated.
Normal Tetra Antenna Power per carrier (+26.0 to +44.0dBm)

S72/BSPWR/+....

S72/BSPWR/- Set Tetra BS Output Power to TR Controlled


S72/BSPWR/-

S72/BSPWR/RED/+nn.n Change Tetra BS Reduced Output Power


Command used set the Tetra BS Antenna Tetra carrier output power
at activated Power Reduction.
Reduced Power Output mode is activated through an input on either SB421
or BS41x.
Available range:
BS421 : +27.0 to +40.0 dBm (0.5 to 10W Tetra)
TR412 : +26.0 to +40.0 dBm (0.4 to 10W Tetra)
TR412H: +30.0 to +44.0 dBm (1.0 to 25W Tetra)
If the value is lower or higher than the permitted range, the minimum
or maximum power respectively will be set.
Reduced Tetra Antenna Power per carrier (+26.0 to +44.0dBm)

S72/BSPWR/RED/+....

S72/BSPWR/RED/- Set Tetra BS Reduced Output Power to TR Controlled


S72/BSPWR/RED/-

S72/BSPWR/RED/N Set Tetra BS Reduced Output Power to Normal


S72/BSPWR/RED/N

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 63 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S72/SCCH/n/n Change number of SCCH to setup


A BS can have up to 3 SCCH, using the available Timeslots on the Main Carrier.
When the BS changes to Single-Carrier operation (e.g due to Carrier faults),
the number of SCCH is changed automatically.
This can be used reduce the number of SCCH to free Timeslots for Voice Calls on
the Main Carrier.
Normal SCCH count (0..3)
Single-Carrier SCCH count (0..3)

S72/SCCH/./.

S72/PDCH/nn Change minimum number of PDCH


Command used to reserve a number of timeslots exclusively for
Packet Data. These wil not be pre-empted for voice communication.
Default is 0.
Minimum number of PDCH (00..99)

S72/PDCH/..

S72/FALLBACK/s Change Fallback Mode Indication


Changes Fallback Mode indication to the mobiles
If activated, fallback mode will be indicated status update are not
received from other Nodes.
Fallback mode indicates to mobiles, that full network service are
not available.
Shall be disabled for single-site systems.
Fallback Mode Indication
+: Activate
-: Disable

S72/FALLBACK/.

S72/MSPWR/n Change max. MS TX Power


Max. MS TX Power Level (0..7)
0: Spare
1: +15dBm (30mW)
2: +20dBm (100mW)
3: +25dBm (300mW)
4: +30dBm (1W)
5: +35dBm (3W)
6: +40dBm (10W)
7: +45dBm (30W)

S72/MSPWR/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 64 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S72/MSACC/nn Change min. MS RX Access Level


Min. MS RX Access Level (0..17)
00: -125dBm
01: -120dBm
02: -115dBm
03: -110dBm
04: -105dBm
05: -100dBm
06: -95dBm
07: -90dBm
..:
15: -50dBm

S72/MSACC/..

S72/ACCPAR/nn Radio Access Parameter


Controls when the mobile starts to reduce its output power at high
received signal strength.
For a 1W mobile, output power will start to decrease at -67dBm input
signal strength with the default setting.
Radio Access Parameter
00: -53dBm
01: -51dBm
02: -49dBm
03: -47dBm
04: -45dBm
05: -43dBm
06: -41dBm
07: -39dBm
08: -37dBm (Default)
09: -35dBm
10: -33dBm
11: -31dBm
12: -29dBm
13: -27dBm
14: -25dBm
15: -23dBm

S72/ACCPAR/..

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 65 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S72/DLTO/nn Change Radio Downlink Timeout


Radio Downlink Timeout
00: Disabled
01: 144 timeslot
02: 288 timeslot
03: 432 timeslot
04: 576 timeslot
05: 720 timeslot
06: 864 timeslot
07: 1008 timeslot
08: 1152 timeslot (Default)
09: 1296 timeslot
10: 1440 timeslot
11: 1584 timeslot
12: 1728 timeslot
13: 1872 timeslot
14: 2016 timeslot
15: 2160 timeslot

S72/DLTO/..

S72/CONNTIMEOUT/n Change Connection Timeout


Controls the timeout Tetra Mobile LA Registration
LA Registration Timeout
0: Disabled
1: 10 min.
2: 30 min.
3: 1 hour
4: 2 hour
5: 4 hour
6: 8 hour
7: 24 hour

S72/CONNTIMEOUT/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 66 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S72/CLASS/ss... Change Subscriber Class


See also Subscriber Class in Profile register
Default value is all enabled
Class 1 (+,-)
Class 2 (+,-)
Class 3 (+,-)
Class 4 (+,-)
Class 5 (+,-)
Class 6 (+,-)
Class 7 (+,-)
Class 8 (+,-)
Class 9 (+,-)
Class 10 (+,-)
Class 11 (+,-)
Class 12 (+,-)
Class 13 (+,-)
Class 14 (+,-)
Class 15 (+,-)
Class 16 (+,-)
1234567890122456

S72/CLASS/................

S72/AIE/s Change Air Interface Encryption activation


Air Interface Encryption
+: Activate
-: Deactivate

S72/AIE/.

S72/MIGRATION/s Change Migration support


Controls the broadcast bit indicating support for
registration of mobiles with MCC/MNC different from
Home MCC/MNC.
Migration support:
+: Yes
-: No

S72/MIGRATION/.

S72/NCSYNC/c Change Neighbour Cell Synchronization


Controls the reported Neighbour Cell Synchronization for the Node
Used of Mobiles to allow Seamless Handover
Neighbour Cell Synchronization
A: Automatic (GPS sync controlled)
-: No
+: Yes

S72/NCSYNC/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 67 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S72/SRT/nn Change Slow Reselect Threshold above Fast


Slow Reselect Threshold above Fast (00..15)(0..30dB)

S72/SRT/..

S72/FRT/nn Change Fast Reselect Threshold


Fast Reselect Threshold (00..15)(0..30dB)

S72/FRT/..

S72/SRH/nn Change Slow Reselect Hysteresis


Slow Reselect Hysteresis (00..15)(0..30dB)

S72/SRH/..

S72/FRH/nn Change Fast Reselect Hysteresis


Fast Reselect Hysteresis (00..15)(0..30dB)

S72/FRH/..

S72/TR Display Tetra TR Configuration


S72/TR

S72/TR/AUTO/s Change Tetra Auto Convert Flag


This flag controls auto conversion between Tetra Primitives and Frequencies.
Normally either Tetra Primitives or Frequencies are entered per TR.
If an ETSI defined relationship exists, the other will be setup automatically.
For non-ETSI defined relations both parameters can be setup independently.
For special systems using ETSI defined primitives in a non-standardized way,
turning off this flag allows independent setup of Tetra Primitives and
Frequencies in a non-ETSI compatible way.
When setting the Flag, all frequencies will be recalculated from the Tetra
primitives.
+: Automatic Primitives<->Frequencies conversion (default)
-: Independent Primitives and Frequencies

S72/TR/AUTO/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 68 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S72/TR/BI/nn/n/n/s Change Tetra Band Info for all TR


NB: This also changes the Frequencies if valid conversion exists!
Frequency Band (0..15)
03: 300MHZ
04: 400MHz
08: 800MHz
Offset (0..3)
0: 0kHz
1: +6.25kHz
2: -6.25kHz
3: +12.5kHz
Duplex Spacing (0..7)
FB=1: 0: 1.6MHz
1: 4.5MHz
2: 0MHz
FB=2: 0: 10MHz
2: 0MHz
FB=3: 0: 10MHz
1: 36MHz
2: 0MHz
3: 8MHz
4: 18MHz
FB=4: 0: 10MHz
1: 7MHz
2: 0MHz
3: 8MHz
4: 5MHz
5: 9.5MHz
FB=5: 0: 10MHz
2: 0MHz
FB=6: 0: 10MHz
2: 0MHz
4: 30MHz
FB=7: 2: 0MHz
4: 30MHz
FB=8: 1: 45MHz
2: 0MHz
3: 18MHz
FB=9: 1: 45MHz
2: 0MHz
3: 18MHz
4: 39MHz
Reverse Operation
-: Normal Operation (BS TX higher than BS RX)
+: Reverse Operation (BS TX lower than BS RX)

S72/TR/BI/../././.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 69 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S72/TR/nn/FREQ/... Change Tetra TR Frequencies


NB: This also changes the Tetra Primitives if valid conversion exists!
TR Address (11..48)
RX Frequency
TX Frequency

S72/TR/../FREQ/........../..........

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 70 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S72/TR/nn/BI/... Change Tetra TR Band Info


NB: This also changes the Frequencies if valid conversion exists!
TR Address (11..48)
Frequency Band (0..15)
03: 300MHZ
04: 400MHz
08: 800MHz
Offset (0..3)
0: 0kHz
1: +6.25kHz
2: -6.25kHz
3: +12.5kHz
Duplex Spacing (0..7)
FB=1: 0: 1.6MHz
1: 4.5MHz
2: 0MHz
FB=2: 0: 10MHz
2: 0MHz
FB=3: 0: 10MHz
1: 36MHz
2: 0MHz
3: 8MHz
4: 18MHz
FB=4: 0: 10MHz
1: 7MHz
2: 0MHz
3: 8MHz
4: 5MHz
5: 9.5MHz
FB=5: 0: 10MHz
2: 0MHz
FB=6: 0: 10MHz
2: 0MHz
4: 30MHz
FB=7: 2: 0MHz
4: 30MHz
FB=8: 1: 45MHz
2: 0MHz
3: 18MHz
FB=9: 1: 45MHz
2: 0MHz
3: 18MHz
4: 39MHz
Reverse Operation
-: Normal Operation (BS TX higher than BS RX)
+: Reverse Operation (BS TX lower than BS RX)

S72/TR/../BI/../././.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 71 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S72/TR/nn/CN/... Change Tetra TR Carrier Number


NB: This also changes the Frequencies if valid conversion exists!
TR Address (11..48)
Carrier Number:
0000..3999: Tetra Carrier Number
---- : Clear Carrier Number

S72/TR/../CN/....

S72/NC Display Tetra Neighbour Cell configuration list


S72/NC

S72/NC/+ Activate Tetra Neighbour Cell configuration list


Only active Cells from the list will be included in Neighbour Cell broadcast
This shall be selected for bigger systems
S72/NC/+

S72/NC/- De-activate Tetra Neighbour Cell List


All active Cells will be included in Neighbour Cell broadcast
This is for small systems only!
S72/NC/-

S72/NC/nnn/+ Add Tetra Neighbour Cell to list


Node Number (001..NodeMax)

S72/NC/.../+

S72/NC/nnn/- Remove Tetra Neighbour Cell from list


Node Number (001..NodeMax)

S72/NC/.../-

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 72 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Voice Gateway configuration:


S73 Display Voice Gateway configuration
S73

S73/CNFG/+ Activate Voice Gateway


Only possible if allowed of License Dongle
S73/CNFG/+

S73/CNFG/- Deactivate Voice Gateway


S73/CNFG/-

S73/ORG/ccc Change Voice Gateway Organization Number


000 : Calls allowed to/from all Home Organizations
001..999: Calls restricted to/from this Home Organization
+++ : Activates use of Organization Number Prefix
Outgoing: 3-digit Prefix is added to B-number.
Call from all Organizations are allowed.
Incoming: 3-digit Prefix shall be present on B-number.
Calls restricted to Prefix Home Organization (All
for 000)
Incoming Prefix is deleted.

S73/ORG/...

S73/CALLMAX/nnn Change max. number of Voice Gateway calls


Used to reduce the maximum number of simultaneous Voice Gateway
calls to less than defined in the License Dongle.
The value is limited to the License Dongle value.
Max. simultaneous calls (001..999)

S73/CALLMAX/...

S73/PRIORITY/nn Change PABX->Tetra Call Priority


Priority of the Tetra call at call setup from PSTN
Call Priority (00..15)

S73/PRIORITY/..

S73/REG/s Change Voice Gateway Registration Selection


Activates the use of SIP registration to the remote PABX/Gateway
It is recommended to use registration
+: Use SIP registration (default)
-: Do not use SIP registration

S73/REG/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 73 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S73/NAME/cc..c Change Voice Gateway Registration Name


Name to use for Registration on remote PABX/Gateway
Name (0..64 characters)

S73/NAME/................................................................

S73/PASSWORD/cc..c Change Voice Gateway Registration Name


Name to use for Registration on remote PABX/Gateway
Password (0..32 characters)

S73/PASSWORD/................................

S73/IPADDR/... Change Voice Gateway Remote IP Address


IP Address of the PABX or SIP proxy conneced to the BSC
IP address

S73/IPADDR/...............

S73/PORT/LOC/nnnnn Change Voice Gateway Local IP Port


Defalut value is 05060
Local IP Port (00001..65535)

S73/PORT/LOC/.....

S73/PORT/REM/nnnnn Change Voice Gateway Remote IP Port


Defalut value is 05060
Remote IP Port (00001..65535)

S73/PORT/REM/.....

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 74 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Packet Data Gateway configuration:


S74 Display Packet Data Gateway configuration
S74

S74/CNFG/+ Activate Packet Data Gateway


Only possible if allowed of License Dongle
S74/CNFG/+

S74/CNFG/- Deactivate Packet Data Gateway


S74/CNFG/-

S74/RIP/s Change Packet Data Gateway RIP selection


Controls output of Routing Information Protocol ver. 2 according
to RFC2453.
If activated, RIP message with IP Address and Mask will be
send every 30 second to multicast address 224.0.0.9 UDP port 520.
To be received of the default gateway for the IP segment, where
RIPv2 shall be activated.
When RIP is activated, a static route in the default gateway
pointing to the Packet Data Gateway is no longer needed.
Note, that RIP is needed for switching between redundant BSC's.
+: Activate RIPv2 output (default)
-: Disable RIPv2 output

S74/RIP/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 75 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Application Gateway configuration:


S75 Display Application Gateway configuration
S75

S75/CNFG/+ Activate Application Gateway


Only possible if allowed of License Dongle
S75/CNFG/+

S75/CNFG/- Deactivate Application Gateway


S75/CNFG/-

S75/CONNMAX/nnn Change max. Application Gateway connections


Used to reduce the maximum number of simultaneous connected Applications to a
lower value as the limit in the License Dongle.
The value is automatically limited to the lowest of the compiled
maximum value and the License Dongle value.
Max. Application Gateway connections (001..999)

S75/CONNMAX/...

S75/STREAMMAX/nnn Change max. Application Gateway Circuit Mode Streams


Used to reduce the maximum total number of simultaneous Circuit Mode
streams for the Application Gateway to lower value than the compiled maximum.
The value is automatically limited to the compiled maximum.
Max. Application Gateway Circuit Mode Streams (001..999)

S75/STREAMMAX/...

S75/CONNTIMEOUT/nnn Connection Timeout


Timeout for the Application connection.
Used to timeout connection at missing Application response.
Default value is 2 minutes.
Connection Timeout (001..255 [minutes])

S75/CONNTIMEOUT/...

S75/DISCRLIST/s Change Application Gateway Discreet Listening


Controls Discreet Listening activation in Application Gateway
+: Activate Discreet Listening support
-: Disable Discreet Listening support (default)

S75/DISCRLIST/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 76 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

Terminal Gateway configuration:


S76 Display Terminal Gateway configuration
S76

S76/CNFG/+ Activate Terminal Gateway


Only possible if allowed of License Dongle
S76/CNFG/+

S76/CNFG/- Deactivate Terminal Gateway


S76/CNFG/-

S76/CONNMAX/nnn Change max. Terminal Gateway connections


Used to reduce the maximum number of simultaneous connected Terminals to a
lower value as the limit in the License Dongle.
The value is automatically limited to the lowest of the compiled
maximum value and the License Dongle value.
Max. Terminal Gateway connections (001..999)

S76/CONNMAX/...

S76/STREAMMAX/nnn Change max. Terminal Gateway Circuit Mode Streams


Used to reduce the maximum total number of simultaneous Circuit Mode
streams for the Terminal Gateway to lower value than the compiled maximum.
The value is automatically limited to the compiled maximum.
Max. Terminal Gateway Circuit Mode Streams (001..999)

S76/STREAMMAX/...

S76/CONNTIMEOUT/nnn Connection Timeout


Timeout for the Terminal connection.
Used to timeout connection at missing Terminal response.
Default value is 2 minutes.
Connection Timeout (001..255 [minutes])

S76/CONNTIMEOUT/...

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 77 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

DMR Cell configuration:


S77 Display DMR Cell configuration
S77

S77/CNFG/+ Activate DMR Cell


Only possible if allowed of License Dongle
S77/CNFG/+

S77/CNFG/- Deactivate DMR Cell


S77/CNFG/-

S77/MCADDR/... Change Base Multicast Address


Defines the base address for the Multicast Address block for
Simulcast Group communication.
The actually used Multicast Address will be the base address added
with the Simuilcast Group number.
The entered address is truncated with a /22 mask.
Default Base Address: 224.239.000.000
IP address

S77/MCADDR/...............

S77/MCPORT/nnnnn Change Multicast UDP Port Number


UDP Port Number for Multicast communication with other Nodes
Default Port Number is 42404
Multicast UDP Port (00000..65535)

S77/MCPORT/.....

S71/UCPORT/nnnnn Change Unicast UDP Port Number


UDP Port Number for Unicast communication with other Nodes
Default Port Number is 42405
Unicast UDP Port (00000..65535)

S77/UCPORT/.....

S77/BSPWR/+nn.n Change DMR BS Output Power


Command used set the DMR BS Antenna Tetra carrier output power
at un-activated Power Reduction.
Available range:
BS422 : +30.0 to +47.0 dBm
TR414 : +30.0 to +47.0 dBm
If the value is lower or higher than the permitted range, the minimum
or maximum power respectively will be set.
NB: This setting controls the Antenna Power, when Power Reduction in not
activated.
Normal DMR Antenna Power per carrier (+30.0 to +47.0dBm)

S77/BSPWR/+....

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 78 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S77/BSPWR/- Set DMR BS Output Power to TR Controlled


S77/BSPWR/-

S77/BSPWR/RED/+nn.n Change DMR BS Reduced Output Power


Command used set the DMR BS Antenna Tetra carrier output power
at activated Power Reduction.
Reduced Power Output mode is activated through an input on either SB421
or BS41x.
Available range:
BS422 : +30.0 to +47.0 dBm (1 to 50W Tetra)
TR414 : +30.0 to +47.0 dBm (1 to 50W Tetra)
If the value is lower or higher than the permitted range, the minimum
or maximum power respectively will be set.
Reduced DMR Antenna Power per carrier (+30.0 to +47.0dBm)

S77/BSPWR/RED/+....

S77/SIMPRIO/n Change DMR Simulcast Controller Priority


DMR Simulcast Controller Priority
0: Disabled
1: Low
2: Medium
3: High

S77/SIMPRIO/.

S77/CARROFS/snnn Change DMR Carrier Frequency Offset


Command used set the DMR Carrier Frequency Offset to improve Simulcast
reception for Mobiles.
Frequency Offset (-127 to +127Hz)

S77/CARROFS/....

S77/BSPWR/RED/- Set DMR BS Reduced Output Power to TR Controlled


S77/BSPWR/RED/-

S77/BSPWR/RED/N Set DMR BS Reduced Output Power to Normal


S77/BSPWR/RED/N

S77/TR Display DMR TR Configuration


S77/TR

S77/TR/nn/FREQ/... Change DMR TR Frequencies


TR Address (11..48)
RX Frequency
TX Frequency

S77/TR/../FREQ/........../..........

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 79 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BSS Base Station Switch ver. 7.76 help

S77/TR/nn/SIMGR/nnn Change DMR TR Simulcast Group membership


TR Address (11..48)
000 : No Simulcast Group membership
001..nnn.: Simulcast Group

S77/TR/../SIMGR/...

S77/NC Display DMR Neighbour Cell configuration list


S77/NC

S77/NC/+ Activate DMR Neighbour Cell configuration list


Only active Cells from the list will be included in Neighbour Cell broadcast
This shall be selected for bigger systems
S77/NC/+

S77/NC/- De-activate DMR Neighbour Cell List


All active Cells will be included in Neighbour Cell broadcast
This is for small systems only!
S77/NC/-

S77/NC/nnn/+ Add DMR Neighbour Cell to list


Node Number (001..NodeMax)

S77/NC/.../+

S77/NC/nnn/- Remove DMR Neighbour Cell from list


Node Number (001..NodeMax)

S77/NC/.../-

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 80 of 80


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

Functional Description

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 1 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

BS Address selection

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 2 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

BSC41x UART Address selection


AU BSC41x UART ADDRESS SELECTION

AU Display BSC41x UART selection


AU

AU+ Select BSC41x UART Address


AU+

AU- Deselect BSC41x UART Address


AU-

AU/FORCED Forced BSC41x UART Address select


Warning: This will disconnect existing user!!!
AU/FORCED

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 3 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

Device Address selection


A DEVICE ADDRESS COMMAND

A Display Address
NB: If BSC41x UART is selected, command is send on UART
and response is coming from selected Device
A

Ann Select BS41x TR Address


TR Address
11..48: TR11..TR48 Transceiver

A..

APnn Select BS41x PS Address


PS Address
11..47: PS11..PS47 Power Supply

AP..

ATnn Select BS41x TC Address


TC Address
11..42: TC11..TC12 TX Combiner

AT..

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 4 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

Software Version:
H00 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION

H00 Display software version


H00

H00/A Display all software version numbers


H00/A

H00/C Display compiler options


H00/C

H00/OM Display OM TCP Connection status


H00/OM

H00/BSC Display OM BSC Connection status


H00/BSC

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 5 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

BS Activation Control
H02 BS ACTIVATION CONTROL

H02 Display BS Activation Status


H02

H02/ACTIVATE BS Activation Request


Sends Activation Request to other BS
H02/ACTIVATE

H02/STANDBY/s Change Forced BSC Standby


+: Forced Standby
-: Normal

H02/STANDBY/.

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 6 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

Alarms
H03 ALARMS

H03 Display BS Alarm state


H03

H03/A Display BSC Alarm Flags


H03/A

H03/IN Display Alarm Inputs


H03/IN

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 7 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

Synchronization Status
H12 SYNCHRONIZATION STATUS

H12 Display Synchronization Status


H12

H12/IN Display Sync Inputs


H12/IN

H12/MASTER Display Master Table


H12/MASTER

H12/PPS Display 1PPS Inputs


H12/PPS

H12/HIST Display OCXO Sync History


H12/HIST

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 8 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

BS Antenna Status
H13 BS ANTENNA STATUS

H13 Display Radio Cell Antenna Status


H13

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 9 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

TR Status
H15 TR STATUS

H15 Display TR Status


H15

H15/c Display TR Status


F: Frequencies/Power
P: GPS Positions
V: Versions
L: Frequency and Power Limits
E: External Alarms

H15/.

H15/nn/A Display TR Alarm Flags


TR Address (11..48)

H15/../A

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 10 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

PS Status
H16 PS STATUS

H16 Display PS Status


H16

H16/AL Display PS411 Alarm Flags


H16/AL

H16/REC Display PS411 Rectifier status


H16/REC

H16/OUT Display PS411 +14V/+26V status


H16/OUT

H16/LED Display PS411 LED status


H16/LED

H16/nn Display PS411 Status


PS Address (11..47)

H16/..

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 11 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

OCXO:
H31 OCXO SYNC

H31 Display OCXO Sync


H31

H31/IN/c Change Sync Input selection


-: Auto Select
F: Forced Free Running
G: Forced GPS RX Lock
0: Forced External 0 Lock
1: Forced External 1 Lock
2: Forced External 2 Lock

H31/IN/.

H31/SET Set OCXO Free Run adjust value to current DAC value
H31/SET

H31/SET/nn.nnn Set OCXO Free Run value


00.000 to 99.999 [%]

H31/SET/......

H31/SAVE Save OCXO Free Run adjust value in Flash


H31/SAVE

H31/STEP/nn.nnn Simulate a PLL Frequency Step


00.000 to 99.999 [%]

H31/STEP/......

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 12 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

Internal GPS RX:


H32 INTERNAL GPS

H32 Display Internal GPS RX Status


H32

H32/VER Display GPS Module Version


H32/VER

H32/N Display next Internal GPS message


Hint: Use the C/H32/N command to display continuously
H32/N

H32/SETUP Setup GPS RX Module


Setup the Internal GPS RX Module and saves the configuration in GPS RX flash
This command shall be executed when a new GPS RX module is installed
H32/SETUP

H32/SEND/cc..c Send Command to GPS RX Module


This command is for testing only
NMEA command

H32/SEND/....................................................................

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 13 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

CMoIP Switch
H34 CMOIP SWITCH

H34 Display all CMoIP Connections


H34

H34/nn/n Display one CMoIP Connection


TR Address (11..48)
Tetra Timeslot (1..4)

H34/../.

H34/nn/n/... CMoIP Multicast Connect


TR Address (11..48)
Tetra Timeslot (1..4)
Multicast IP Address

H34/.././...............

H34/nn/n/REL CMoIP Multicast Release


TR Address (11..48)
Tetra Timeslot (1..4)

H34/.././REL

H34/C Clear Message Counters


H34/C

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 14 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

Message Trace:
H48 MESSAGE TRACE

H48 Display Message Trace


H48

H48- Stop all Message Traces


H48-

H48/C Clear Trace Counters


H48/C

H48/UDP/+ Activate Trace output to UDP


UDP output counter will be cleared
H48/UDP/+

H48/UDP/- Stop Trace output to UDP


H48/UDP/-

H48/UDP/nnn... Change Trace UDP address+port


UDP IP address
UDP port number (default 42397)

H48/UDP/.............../.....

H48/FILE/+ Open Trace output file


File will be cleared if existing
File output counter will be cleared
H48/FILE/+

H48/FILE/- Close Trace output file


H48/FILE/-

H48/FILE/cc..c Change Trace filename


File will be closed if open
NB: There shall be write access permission to the file location
Filename (e.g. C:\Tetra\Work\Trace1.lan)

H48/FILE/.........................................................

H48/n/s Start/Stop Trace


Trace Number (1..4)
Action
+: Start Trace
-: Stop Trace

H48/./.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 15 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

H48/n/nn/n/c Setup Trace Test Point


Trace Number (1..4)
TR (11..18)
Timeslot (1..4)
Test Point
U: Unencrypted
E: Encrypted (unencrypted if no AIE)

H48/./.././.

Command description:

The H48 Commands control the TR Signalling Trace functionality.

Up to 4 different Test Points can be activated on any TR and timeslot in total.


Both Downlink and Uplink traffic is monitored on the TR's, and excludes or
includes
Air Interface Encryption.

The output from the Test Points can be output realtime in UDP messages, and can
also be written to a file, either located locally or on a remote Computer.

The output can be analyzed with the Tetra Protocol Analyzer from fjord-e-
design.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 16 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

Tetra Channel Test:


H49 TETRA CHANNEL TEST

H49 Display Tetra channel test selection


H49

H49/c Change Sync Mode


A: PRBS Auto Sync
M: PRBS Forced Multiframe Sync
T: PRBS Forced Timeslot Sync

H49/.

H49/n Change Sync Output Frequency


1: 1 second
2: 17 second (TDMA frame start)
3: 51 second (Multiframe start)

H49/.

H49/nn/n/nn Select Logical Channel to evaluate


TR Address (11..48)
Tetra Timeslot (1..4)
Uplink test point channel types:
07: TCH/7.2
08: SCH/F
09: STCH
10: TCH/2.4 N=1
11: SCH/HU
16: TCH/S
18: TCH/4.8 N=1
Downlink test point channel types:
57: TCH/7.2
60: TCH/2.4 N=1
66: TCH/S
68: TCH/4.8 N=1

H49/.././..

H49/CNTR Display Counters


H49/CNTR

H49/CLEAR Clear Counter Values


H49/CLEAR

H49/DATA Display data from TR


H49/DATA

Command description:

The H49 commands controls the build-in TETRA channel test features.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 17 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

When channel test is activated, a test point at the output from or input to
the receiver is selected. Received bursts including status will be analyzed
and BER/MER calculated.

When channel test is activated, the BS421 TX switches to uplink mode and
generates the selected channel type. When TX is keyed and RFTL activated,
an RX input signal can be generated for the testing.

Alternatively, a test signal can be generated from an external source, e.g.


an R&S SMIQ or Anritsu signal generator

The uplink test point is intended for normal receiver channel tests.

The downlink test point is intented for test of received traffic from the
lines.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 18 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

DC Voltmeter
H60 DC VOLTMETER

H60 Display DC Voltmeter


H60

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 19 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

Co-Processor
*H61 CO-PROCESSOR

H61 Display Co-Processor Status


H61

H61/Fhhh0 Display DPRAM


DPRAM Address (F8000..FFFF0)

H61/F...0

H61/MEM/hhhhh Read CP Memory


CP Memory Address (00000..FFFFF)

H61/MEM/.....

H61/PORT/hhhhh Read CP Port


CP Port Address (0000..FFFF)

H61/PORT/....

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 20 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

BS<->BSC Message test queue


H63 BS<->BSC MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

H63 Display BSC Link Status


H63

H63/N Display next BSC message


H63/N

H63/N+ Display next BSC message extended


H63/N+

H63/S Set BSC message test queue to start


H63/S

H63/C Clear BSC message test queue


H63/C

H63/s BSC Message suppression


+: Display all BSC messages
-: Suppress some BSC messages (default)

H63/.

H63/n/hh/hh..hh Send Message to BSC


BSC Number (1..2)
Message ID (00..FF hex)
Payload (hex)
0 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

H63/./../......................................................................

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 21 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

UDP Message test queue


H64 UDP MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

H64 Display UDP Link Status


H64

H64/N Display next UDP message


H64/N

H64/N+ Display next UDP message extended


H64/N+

H64/S Set UDP message test queue to start


H64/S

H64/C Clear UDP message test queue


H64/C

H64/s UDP Message suppression


+: Display all UDP messages
-: Suppress some UDP messages (default)

H64/.

H64/hh/hh..hh Send Message to Redundant BS


Message ID (00..FF hex)
Payload (hex)
0 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34

H64/../......................................................................

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 22 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

BS<->TR Message test queue


H65 BS<->TR MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

H65 Display TR Link Status


H65

H65/PS Display PS411 Link Status


H65/PS

H65/N Display next TR message


H65/N

H65/N+ Display next TR message extended


H65/N+

H65/S Set TR message test queue to start


H65/S

H65/C Clear TR message test queue


H65/C

H65/s TR Message suppression


+: Display all TR messages
-: Suppress some TR messages (default)

H65/.

H65/nn/hh/hh..hh Send Message to TR


TR Address (11..48)
Message ID (00..FF hex)
Payload (hex)
0 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
34


H65/../../.....................................................................
.

H65/PS/nn/hh/hh..hh Send Message to PS411


PS Address (11..47)
Message ID (00..FF hex)
Payload (hex)
0 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
34


H65/PS/../../..................................................................
....

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 23 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

Program Download
H68 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

H68 Display Program Download Status


H68

H68/TR412 Display TR412 Program Download Status


Command only available on active BSC
H68/TR412

H68/TR412/cc TR412 Program Download command


1) Sends Program Download command to TR412
2) TR412 restarts in Boot Mode, erases the flash program area
and sends download request to BSC.
3) BSC reads ...\Pgm\TR412\TR412.bin file from disk
4) BSC starts download to reprogram TR412 Flash
5) TR412 restarts again and resumes normal operation
NB: Boot Part of TR412 software is NOT updated.
Boot version can be displayed with the TR412 '00/A' command.
Command only available on active BSC
A : All TR
11..48: TR11..TR48

H68/TR412/..

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 24 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

BS configuration:
H70 Display command function
H70

H70/SAVE Save BS configuration in file


Note that BS Configuration changes are saved automatically
H70/SAVE

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 25 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

Common system configuration:


H71 Display Common BS configuration
H71

H71/CNFG/+ Activate BS
H71/CNFG/+

H71/CNFG/- Deactivate BS
H71/CNFG/-

H71/BSNO/n Change BS Number


BS Number (1..2)

H71/BSNO/.

H71/RACKNO/n Change Rack Number


Rack number (1st digit of Address)
Rack Number (1..4)

H71/RACKNO/.

H71/REDBS/s Change Redundant BS Configuration


Redundant BS Configuration Flag
+: Configured
-: Not configured

H71/REDBS/.

H71/REDBS/... Change Redundant BS IP Address


IP Address

H71/REDBS/...............

H71/BSC/n/s Change BSC Configuration


BSC number (1..2)
BSC Configuration Flag
+: Select BSC
-: Deselect BSC

H71/BSC/./.

H71/BSC/n/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Change BSC IP Address


BSC number (1..2)
IP Address

H71/BSC/./...............

H71/CMOIP Display CMoIP selection


NB: Command not available in Damm TetraFlex
H71/CMOIP

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 26 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

H71/CMOIP/s Change CMoIP selection


NB: Command not available in Damm TetraFlex
CMoIP Selection
-: CMoIP Multicast
+: CMoIP to BSS

H71/CMOIP/.

H71/CMOIP/n/... Change CMoIP BSS IP Address


NB: Command not available in Damm TetraFlex
Active BSS number (1..2)
IP Address

H71/CMOIP/./...............

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 27 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

Synchronization configurations
H72 Synchronisation

H72 Display BSC412 Sync selection


H72

H72/MASTER/c Change Master Priority


Changes the Synchronization Priority for the BS
Master 1 shall be selected for the Primary Master in a cell.
Master 2..4 shall be selected for the Backup Masters in a cell.
Master 0 shall only be selected if the BS is Global Master used to
synchronize other cells.
Warning: The Master selections shall be unique within a Radio Cell
0: Master 0 (For Global Master) (Highest Priority)
1: Master 1 (For Primary Master in a Cell)
2: Master 2
3: Master 3
4: Master 4 (Lowest Priority)
S: Slave

H72/MASTER/.

H72/CENTSECOFS/snnnnnnnnnn Change Century Second offset


Used to change the Century Second offset, where all TETRA counters started
For standard Damm TetraFlex this value shall be 0.
Century Second Offset
DAMM: +0000000000 [2000-01-01 00:00:00 UTC]
EADS: +0031536013 [1999-01-01 00:00:00 GPS]

H72/CENTSECOFS/...........

H72/CENTSECOFS/DAMM Change Century Second offset to DAMM


Used to clear Century Seconds offset for DAMM timing
Value: 0 for 2000-01-01 00:00:00 UTC
H72/CENTSECOFS/DAMM

H72/CENTSECOFS/EADS Change Century Second offset to EADS


Used to setup the Centrury Seconds offset for EADS timing
Value: +31536013 (1 year + 13 leap seconds) for 1999-01-01 00:00:00 GPS
H72/CENTSECOFS/EADS

H72/GPSRXOFS/snnn.n Change GPS RX offset


Used to change the GPS RX time offset
For standard Damm TetraFlex this value shall be 0.
GPS RX offset
DAMM: +000.0 [usec.]
EADS: +111.1 [usec.]

H72/GPSRXOFS/......

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 28 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

H72/GPSRXOFS/DAMM Change GPS RX offset to DAMM


Used to clear the GPS RX offset for DAMM timing
Value: +000.0 userc.
H72/GPSRXOFS/DAMM

H72/GPSRXOFS/EADS Change GPS RX offset to EADS


Used to setup the GPS RX offset for EADS timing
Value: -055.6 usec.
H72/GPSRXOFS/EADS

H72/IN/n/s Activate/Deactivate BSC412 Sync Input


Input
G: GPS RX
0: Ext. 0 (Other BSC)
1: Ext. 1
2: Ext. 2
Activate/Deactivate
+: Configured
-: Not configured

H72/IN/./.

H72/IN/n/... Setup BSC412 External Sync Input


Input
1: External 1
2: External 2
Primary Flag
-: Not Primary Input (Normal)
+: Primary Input (For Remote Primary Reference only)
IP Address
Cable Delay in usec. (000.0..999.9)

H72/IN/././.............../.....

H72/OUT Display BSC412 Sync Message Output Table


H72/OUT

H72/OUT/... Add/Remove BSC412 Sync Message Output


All units connected to the 1PPS output shall be added here
Max. 30 IP Addresses can be configured
Outputs are NOT active if Sync Slave Priority
IP Address (000..255)
Action:
+: Add
-: Remove

H72/OUT/.............../.

Command description:

The TETRA Base Station TR's need to be time synchronized to operate correctly.

Most importantly, all TR's in a radio cell shall be time synchronized together

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 29 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

to
ensure correct timing for the mobiles, when switching from the control channel
to
a traffic channel on another TR.

For a multi-cell systems, all radio cells are also recommended to be time
synchronized together
to enable use of seamless handover (cell re-selection).

The Damm BS system is provided with a flexible system to provide


synchronization
between individual Transceivers. Build-in GPS Receivers give absolute time
synchronization to the radio cells. External Inputs can also be marked as
Primary
Sync References.

When as BS is Network locked, automatic frequency correction of the Master


Oscillator (RX and TX carrier frequencies) are provided, and Seamless Handover
to
other Network Synchronized Cells are activated.

The BS can be setup to run as either Sync Master 0..4 or Slave. The Masters
shall preferably be provided with GPS antennas or an External Primary Sync
source.
The remaining BS's shall be setup as Slave and do not need a GPS antenna.

The BS is provided with one External 1PPS (1 Pulse Per Second) output and
three external 1PPS inputs. The Slaves shall have their external 1PPS inputs
connected to Masters.

In addition to the hardware 1PPS, sync messages are send every second on IP
from the Masters to attached BS's.

A Master will indicate Master Mode, if:

1) Synchronized to the internal GPS RX or


2) Synchronized to an External Input marked as Primary and indicating
Master Mode

Master 0 priority:
1) Int. GPS RX
2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode
3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode
4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode
5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode
6) Ext. Master 1, Resync-only
7) Ext. Master 2, Resync-only
8) Ext. Master 3, Resync-only
9) Ext. Master 4, Resync-only
10)Int. Free-Run

Master 1 priority:
1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode
2) Int. GPS RX

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 30 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode


4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode
5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode
6) Ext. Master 0
7) Ext. Master 2, Resync-only
8) Ext. Master 3, Resync-only
9) Ext. Master 4, Resync-only
10)Int. Free-Run

Master 2 priority:
1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode
2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode
3) Int. GPS RX
4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode
5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode
6) Ext. Master 0
7) Ext. Master 1
8) Ext. Master 3, Resync-only
9) Ext. Master 4, Resync-only
10)Int. Free-Run

Master 3 priority:
1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode
2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode
3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode
4) Int. GPS RX
5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode
6) Ext. Master 0
7) Ext. Master 1
8) Ext. Master 2
9) Ext. Master 4, Resync-only
10)Int. Free-Run

Master 4 priority:
1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode
2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode
3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode
4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode
5) Int. GPS RX
6) Ext. Master 0
7) Ext. Master 1
8) Ext. Master 2
9) Ext. Master 3
10)Int. Free-Run

Slave priority:
1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode
2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode
3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode
4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode
5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode
6) Ext. Master 0
7) Ext. Master 1
8) Ext. Master 2

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 31 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

9) Ext. Master 3
10)Ext. Master 4
11)Int. GPS RX
12)Int. Free-Run

If no GPS synchronized Master or higher prioritized free-running Master is


available at re-start, Masters will try initially to synchronize to lower
prioritized free-running Masters.

A BS will resync automatically after a short time, if Century Second


and Phase Detector are out of sync with a valid sync source.

Masters shall be setup even if GPS antennas are not used and internal GPS RX
are deselected, to ensure proper synchronization between all TR's.

Typical BS41x configuration without redundant BSC412:


BS activated on BSC412: Sync Master 1

Typical BS41x configuration with redundant BSC412:


BSC412-11: Sync Master 1
BSC412-12: Sync Master 2

Typical dual-rack BS41x configuration with redundant BSC412 in each rack:


BSC412-11: Sync Master 1
BSC412-12: Sync Master 2
BSC412-21: Sync Master 3
BSC412-22: Sync Master 4

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 32 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

Radio Cell configuration


H73 Display Radio Cell configuration
H73

H73/RXDIV/c Change RX Diversity configuration


RX diversity configuration
D: Diversity
A: RX-A antenna only
B: RX-B antenna only

H73/RXDIV/.

H73/RXPREGAIN/n.n Change RX Pre-Gain


TMA pregain in dB (0.0..9.9, nom. 6.0)

H73/RXPREGAIN/...

H73/RXBAND/... Change RX frequency band


Define the RX frequency band of the cell
Shall match the TMA filter adjustment
RX low frequency
nnn.nnnnnn: Frequency [MHz]
000.000000: Not setup
RX high frequency
nnn.nnnnnn: Frequency [MHz]
000.000000: Not setup

H73/RXBAND/........../..........

H73/TXBAND/... Change TX frequency band


Define the TX frequency band of the cell
Shall match the TX filter adjustment
TX low frequency
nnn.nnnnnn: Frequency [MHz]
000.000000: Not setup
TX high frequency
nnn.nnnnnn: Frequency [MHz]
000.000000: Not setup

H73/TXBAND/........../..........

H73/TXANT/... Change TX antenna alarm settings


TX antenna L1 alarm setting (06..16 [dB Return Loss])
TX antenna L2 alarm setting (06..16 [dB Return Loss])
Minimum forward power (0.2..9.9 [W])
Minimum reflected power (0.01..0.99 [W])

H73/TXANT/../../.../0...

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 33 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark BS Base Station ver. 7.76 help

Power Supply configuration


H74 Display PS411 Power Supply configuration
H74

H74/AC/s Change PS411 AC Input selection


AC input
+: AC input provided
-: No AC input provided (Mains missing alarm suppressed)

H74/AC/.

H74/CHARGE/s Change PS411 Battery Charging selection


NB: This is only significant, if AC Input is selected
Battery charging
+: Battery charging used
-: No Battery charging

H74/CHARGE/.

H74/CHGVOLT/nn.n Change PS411 Charging Voltage


NB: This is only significant, if AC Input and Charging is selected
Charging voltage at 25 Celsius in Volt (52.8..55.2)

H74/CHGVOLT/....

H74/CHGCOMP/nnn Change PS411 Charging Compensation


NB: This is only significant, if AC Input and Charging is selected
Charging temperature compensation (48..120) [-mV/C]

H74/CHGCOMP/...

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 34 of 34


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

Software Versions:
00 SOFTWARE VERSIONS

00 Display Welcome Message


00

00/A Display all software versions


00/A

00/C Display compiler options


00/C

00/OM Display OM TCP connections


00/OM

00+ Open GUI Console Window


00+

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 1 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

Gateway Connection:
01 Display Gateways Connection Status
01

01/L Display Gateway Status List


01/L

01/+ Gateway reconnect request


Request Gateway reconnect
For Auto, next in list will be tried
01/+

01/C Clear Gateway errors


01/C

01/A Auto Gateway select


01/A

01/n Forced Gateway select


Gateway Number (0..9)

01/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 2 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

License Dongle:
04 LICENSE DONGLE

04 Display License Dongle Settings


Displays the settings read from dongle at application startup
04

04/I Display License Dongle Info


Displays the info read from dongle at application startup
04/I

04/D Display License Dongle Memory in Decimal


Displays the info read from dongle at application startup
04/D

04/H Display License Dongle Memory in Hex


Displays the info read from dongle at application startup
04/H

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 3 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

Node Status:
10 Display Nodes
10

10/c Display Node Status


S: Subscriber Register
C: Coordinates (Positions)
R: Radio Cell
V: Voice Gateway
P: Packet Date Gateway
R: Application Gateway

10/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 4 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

Subscriber Register:
20 Display Subscriber Register
20

20/RELOAD Subscriber Register reload from Gateway


20/RELOAD

20/CHECK Subscriber Register consistency check


20/CHECK

20/QUE Display Subscriber Register Queues


20/QUE

20/TSI/.../L Display TSI Chain List


NB: For debug only!
MCC (Mobile Country Code) (0001..1023)
MNC (Mobile Network Code) (0001..16383)
SSI (Short Subscriber Identity (0001..16777215)

20/TSI/....:.....:......../L

20/TSICHAIN/nnnnnn Display TSI Chain List


NB: For debug only!
SubIx (000000..nnnnnn)

20/TSICHAIN/......

20/TSIIXTB Display TSI Index Table


NB: For debug only!
20/TSIIXTB

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 5 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

Profile Register:
21 Display Profile Register Status
21

21/nnnn Display Profile


Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/....

21/nnnn/L/snn/nn Display Profile list


Profile Number (0000..9999)
Line Offset (-50..+50)
Number of Lines (01..50)

21/..../L/.../..

21/nnnn/ADD/nnn/cc..c Add/Change Profile


Command to Add or Change Profile
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Home Organization
nnn: 000..999 (0=All)
---: Home Organization of Application
Description

21/..../ADD/.../........................

21/nnnn/ASSORG Display Associated Organizations


Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../ASSORG

21/nnnn/ASSORG/s Change use of Associated Organizations


Activates/deactivates the use of Associated Organizations
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Associated Organizations
+: Activate
-: Deactivate

21/..../ASSORG/.

21/nnnn/ASSORG/nnn/s Add/Remove Associated Organization


Profile Number (0000..9999)
Associated Organization Number (001..999)
Action
+: Add
-: Remove

21/..../ASSORG/.../.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 6 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

21/nnnn/SSICALL/s Setup SSI Call Permission


Selects whether Individual Calls are allowed with SSI
If not selected, Individual Calls are only allowed wit User Number
Profile Number (0000..9999)
+: Allow Individual Calls with SSI
-: Only allow Individual Calls with User Number

21/..../SSICALL/.

21/nnnn/SSIGROUP/s Use SSI as Talking Party Identification for Group Calls


Selects the use of SSI as Talking Party Identification for Group Calls
to bypass the bug in certain mobiles (Motorola)
NB: This flag affects only GSSI's attached to the Profile (not ISSI)
Profile Number (0000..9999)
+: Use SSI as TPI for Group Call
-: Use User Number as TPI for Group Call (default)

21/..../SSIGROUP/.

21/nnnn/AUTH/s Change Authentication capability required flag


Profile Number (0000..9999)
+: Authentication capability required at registration
-: Authentication capability not required at registration
(default)

21/..../AUTH/.

21/nnnn/AIE/s Change Air Interface Encryption capability required flag


If the flag is set a check for match between the Profiles required TEAx
and the mobiles supported TEAx is done.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
+: Air Interface Encryption capability required at registration
-: Air Interface Encryption capability not required at
registration (default)

21/..../AIE/.

21/nnnn/E2EE/s Change End-To-End Encryption capability required flag


Profile Number (0000..9999)
+: End-To-End Encryption capability required at registration
-: End-To-End Encryption capability not required at registration
(default)

21/..../E2EE/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 7 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

21/nnnn/SECMODE/n Setup Security Mode


For optional modes, service will be allowed without Authentication/Air
InterFace encryption, when no Security Set is available or when the SSI
Authentication and Air Interface Encryption disable flags are set.
For mandatory modes, service will only be permitted with full Authentication
and Air Interface Encryption.
Note, that Air Interface Encryption requires, that permission is activated
in the License Dongle.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Mode:
0: Class 1, no Auth./AIE
1: Class 1, Auth. optional, AIE none
2: Class 1, Auth. mandatory, AIE none
3: Class 3, Aut. optional, AIE optional
4: Class 3, Auth. mandatory, AIE mandatory

21/..../SECMODE/.

21/nnnn/SECKSG/nn Setup Key Stream Generator


Used with Air Interface Encryption only
Note, that the TR shall support the selected KSG.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
KSG:
00: TEA1
01: TEA2
02: TEA3
03: TEA4
04..15: Reserved

21/..../SECKSG/..

21/nnnn/SHORTNO/n/nn..n Setup Short Number Format


Specifies Short Number format
When a number with a length of 'Short Number Length' is dialled, the
'Short Number Prefix' is automatically added before the lookup in the
Subscriber Register.
Leading zeroes in the Prefix are not significant.
The sum of 'Short Number Length' and the length of 'Short Number Prefix' may
not exceed 7 digits.
The function has no effect for PSTN calls.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Short Number Length (0..6) (0=Disabled)
Short Number Prefix ("" to "999999")

21/..../SHORTNO/./......

21/nnnn/DISPNO/nnnnnnn Setup Dispatcher User Number


User Number of the Dispatcher used to authorize calls
Leading zeroes are not significant
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Dispatcher User Number (1..9999999, blank or 0 for disabled)

21/..../DISPNO/.......

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 8 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

21/nnnn/PRIORITY/nn Select Call Priority


Sets the Call Priority
This will overrule Call Priority request 1..14 from mobiles
Emergency Priority 15 and 16 from mobiles will always be passed unchanged
Mobile controlled Priority is default (see this command)
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Call Priority
01..05: Low Priority (PTT Priority=0)
06..11: High Priority (PTT Priority=1)
12..14: Pre-emptive Priority (PTT Priority=2)

21/..../PRIORITY/..

21/nnnn/PRIORITY/- Select Mobile controlled Call Priority


Lets the mobile control the Call and PTT Priority
This is the default setting
Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../PRIORITY/-

21/nnnn/INDIVTIMEOUT/nn.n Set Individual PTT Call Inactivity Timeout


Sets the time from last PTT released until Individual PTT Call termination.
Default setting is Disabled.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Individuel PTT Call Inactivity timeout
00.0 : Disabled
00.1..25.0: Timeout value [minutes]

21/..../INDIVTIMEOUT/....

21/nnnn/INDIVTIMEOUT/- Disable Individual PTT Call Inactivity Timeout


Disables timeout of Individual PTT Call.
This is the default setting.
Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../INDIVTIMEOUT/-

21/nnnn/CALLDURMAX/nnn Set max. Call Duration


Sets the maximum call duration of Individual Calls.
The default value is infinity (see this command)
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Max Call Duration (001..250 minutes)

21/..../CALLDURMAX/...

21/nnnn/CALLDURMAX/- Set Call Duration limit to infinity


Sets the maximum call duration of Individual Calls to infinity.
This is the default setting
Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../CALLDURMAX/-

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 9 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

21/nnnn/PTTDURMAX/nnn Set max. PTT Duration


Sets the maximun talking period at Simplex Calls
The default value is disabled (Mobile controlled) (see this command)
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Max PTT Duration (002..250 seconds)

21/..../PTTDURMAX/...

21/nnnn/PTTDURMAX/- Disable PTT Duration limit


Sets the maximun talking period at Simplex Calls to be controlled
of the Mobile.
The system will still limit the time to maximum 310 seconds,
which is longer than the maximum 300 second setting for the mobile.
This is the default setting.
Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../PTTDURMAX/-

21/nnnn/LATEENTRY/nn Set Late Entry Timer


Sets the Late Entry Timer.
Controls the duraton between active Group announcements on Control Channel.
The default value is 15 seconds.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Late Entry Timer (05..60 seconds)

21/..../LATEENTRY/..

21/nnnn/LATEENTRY/- Disable Late Entry Timer


Disables Late Entry Timer.
Stops the active Group announcements on Control Channel.
The default value is 15 seconds.
Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../LATEENTRY/-

21/nnnn/SCCH/- Select Auto SCCH allocation


Selects automatic allocation SCCH's on BS.
The actually used Timeslot for Control Channel
depends on the number of SCCH's setup on the
BS Main Carrier.
Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../SCCH/-

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 10 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

21/nnnn/SCCH/nn Select Manual SCCH allocation


Selects manually allocation of SCCH's on BS.
The actually used Timeslot for Control Channel
depends on the number of SCCH's setup on the
BS Main Carrier.
MCCH only One SCCH Two SCCH Three SCCH
---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
00: TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH)
01: TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1) TS2(SCCH1) TS2(SCCH1)
02: TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH) TS3(SCCH2) TS3(SCCH2)
03: TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1) TS1(MCCH) TS4(SCCH3)
04: TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1) TS1(MCCH)
05: TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1) TS3(SCCH2) TS2(SCCH1)
06: TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH) TS3(SCCH2)
07: TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1) TS2(SCCH1) TS4(SCCH3)
08: TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH) TS3(SCCH2) TS1(MCCH)
09: TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1) TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1)
10: TS1(MCCH) TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1) TS3(SCCH2)
11: TS1(MCCH) TS2(SCCH1) TS3(SCCH2) TS4(SCCH3)
Profile Number (0000..9999)
SCCH Allocation (00..11)

21/..../SCCH/..

21/nnnn/PD/MS/nn/nnn Change PD Channel Mobile allocation


Changes the way Mobiles are allocated to Packed Data Channels.
Mobiles only share a PD Channel with Mobiles of same Class.
Class 00 does not allow sharing, but allows use of multi-slot PD Channels.
Class 01..99 allows sharing up to the max number of Mobiles on a single-slot
PDCH.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Class:
00 : Default (No PD Channel sharing, multi- or single-slot)
01..99: Class of sharing Mobiles (PD Channel sharing, single-
slot only)
Max. no. of Mobiles sharing a PD Channel (001..100)

21/..../PD/MS/../...

21/nnnn/PD/TIMER/nnn Change PD Channel Ready Timer


Changes the Ready Timer for the Packed Data Channel
Can increase the Ready Timer for e.g. SCADA systems
Default: 5 sec.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Ready Timer (005..250 sec.)

21/..../PD/TIMER/...

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 11 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

21/nnnn/CLASS/M Setup Subscriber Class Mobile controlled


See also Subscriber Class in Node configuration
Mobile controlled is the default setting
Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../CLASS/M

21/nnnn/CLASS/ss... Setup Subscriber Class Network controlled


Note, that all - means Mobile controlled
See also Subscriber Class in Node configuration
Mobile controlled is the default setting
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Class 1 (+,-)
Class 2 (+,-)
Class 3 (+,-)
Class 4 (+,-)
Class 5 (+,-)
Class 6 (+,-)
Class 7 (+,-)
Class 8 (+,-)
Class 9 (+,-)
Class 10 (+,-)
Class 11 (+,-)
Class 12 (+,-)
Class 13 (+,-)
Class 14 (+,-)
Class 15 (+,-)
Class 16 (+,-)
1234567890122456

21/..../CLASS/................

21/nnnn/SERVRESTR Display SSI Service Restrictions


Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../SERVRESTR

21/nnnn/SERVRESTR/s Change SSI Service Restriction activation


Selects activation/deactivation of all SSI Service Restrictions
Profile Number (0000..9999)
+: Restrictions active according to individual flags
-: All Restrictions disabled (default)

21/..../SERVRESTR/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 12 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/c Display Service Permission flags


Profile Number (0000..9999)
SSI Kind
M: Mobile SSI
D: Dial-In SSI
A: Application SSI
T: Terminal SSI

21/..../SERVPERM/.

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/M/nn/c Change Mobile SSI Service Permission flag


NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be
significant.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Mobile SSI Permission Flag Number (00..15)
00: Individual Duplex Call to Mobile
01: Individual Duplex Call from Mobile
02: Individual Simplex Call to Mobile
03: Individual Simplex Call from Mobile
04: Individual Call to Voice Gateway
05: Individual Call from Voice Gateway
06: Individual Call to Application Gateway
07: Individual Call from Application Gateway
08: Group Call
09: Send SDS
10: Receive Individual SDS
11: Packet Data Call
12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway
13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway
Flag
+: Service allowed
A: Service allowed with Dispatcher Authorization
(00..07 and 12..13 only)
-: Service not allowed

21/..../SERVPERM/M/../.

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/D/nn/s Change Dial-In SSI Service Permission flag


NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be
significant.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Dial-In SSI Permission Flag Number (00..15)
06: Group Call
Flag
+: Service allowed
-: Service not allowed

21/..../SERVPERM/D/../.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 13 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/A/nn/s Change Application SSI Service Permission flag


NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be
significant.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Application SSI Permission Flag Number (00..15)
00: Individual Call to Mobile
01: Individual Call from Mobile
02: Individual Call to Voice Gateway
03: Individual Call from Voice Gateway
04: Individual Call to Application Gateway
05: Individual Call from Application Gateway
06: Group Call
07: Send SDS
08: Receive Individual SDS
12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway
13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway
Flag
+: Service allowed
-: Service not allowed

21/..../SERVPERM/A/../.

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/T/nn/s Change Terminal SSI Service Permission flag


NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be
significant.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Terminal SSI Permission Flag Number (00..15)
00: Individual Call to Mobile
01: Individual Call from Mobile
02: Individual Call to Voice Gateway
03: Individual Call from Voice Gateway
04: Individual Call to Application Gateway
05: Individual Call from Application Gateway
06: Group Call
07: Send SDS
08: Receive Individual SDS
12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway
13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway
Flag
+: Service allowed
-: Service not allowed

21/..../SERVPERM/T/../.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 14 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/M/cc..c Change all Mobile SSI Service Permission flags


NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be
significant.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Mobile SSI Service Permission Flags:
+: Service allowed
A: Service allowed with Dispatcher Authorization (00..07
and 12..13 only)
-: Service not allowed
00: Individual Duplex Call to Mobile
01: Individual Duplex Call from Mobile
02: Individual Simplex Call to Mobile
03: Individual Simplex Call from Mobile
04: Individual Call to Voice Gateway
05: Individual Call from Voice Gateway
06: Individual Call to Application Gateway
07: Individual Call from Application Gateway
08: Group Call
09: Send SDS
10: Receive Individual SDS
11: Packet Data Call
12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway
13: Individial Call from Terminal Gateway
14: (Spare)
15: (Spare)

21/..../SERVPERM/M/................

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/D/ss..s Change all Dial-In SSI Service Permission flags


NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be
significant.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Dial-In SSI Service Permission Flags:
+: Service allowed
-: Service not allowed
00: (Spare)
01: (Spare)
02: (Spare)
03: (Spare)
04: (Spare)
05: (Spare)
06: Group Call
07: (Spare)
08: (Spare)
09: (Spare)
10: (Spare)
11: (Spare)
12: (Spare)
13: (Spare)
14: (Spare)
15: (Spare)

21/..../SERVPERM/D/................

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 15 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/A/ss..s Change all Application SSI Service Permission flags


NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be
significant.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Application SSI Service Permission Flags:
+: Service allowed
-: Service not allowed
00: Individual Call to Mobile
01: Individual Call from Mobile
02: Individual Call to Voice Gateway
03: Individual Call from Voice Gateway
04: Individual Call to Application Gateway
05: Individual Call from Application Gateway
06: Group Call
07: Send SDS
08: Receive Individual SDS
09: (Spare)
10: (Spare)
11: (Spare)
12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway
13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway
14: (Spare)
15: (Spare)

21/..../SERVPERM/A/................

21/nnnn/SERVPERM/T/ss..s Change all Terminal SSI Service Permission flags


NB: Common Service Restrictions shall be activated for individual flags to be
significant.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Terminal SSI Service Permission Flags:
+: Service allowed
-: Service not allowed
00: Individual Call to Mobile
01: Individual Call from Mobile
02: Individual Call to Voice Gateway
03: Individual Call from Voice Gateway
04: Individual Call to Application Gateway
05: Individual Call from Application Gateway
06: Group Call
07: Send SDS
08: Receive Individual SDS
09: (Spare)
10: (Spare)
11: (Spare)
12: Individual Call to Terminal Gateway
13: Individual Call from Terminal Gateway
14: (Spare)
15: (Spare)

21/..../SERVPERM/T/................

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 16 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

21/nnnn/GROUPRESTR/s Change Group Call Restriction


The flag restricts the Profiles Individual Subscribers to make Group Calls.
When the flag is cleared, the Profiles Individual Subscribers can make call to
all
Home and Associated Groups according to each Groups specific restriction.
When the flag is set the Profiles Individual Subscribers can only make call to
Groups
listed in the Group Permission table.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Individual Subscribers Group Call Restrictions:
-: Call allowed to all Groups, only limited by
the Groups specific restriction.
+: Call only allowed to Groups listed in the
Group Permission table.

21/..../GROUPRESTR/.

21/nnnn/GROUPPERM Display Group Permission table


Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../GROUPPERM

21/nnnn/GROUPPERM/nnnnnnn/ADD/s Add/Change Group Permission table entry


The Group Permission Table is used to give Individual Subscribers permission
to make Groups call to specific Groups.
By default Individual Subscribers can make Group Call to all Groups belonging
to Home and Associated Organizations independent of the permission in this
table.
Group Calls for the the Profiles Individual Subscribers can be restricted in
two independet ways:
1) Profile restriction:
If the Group Restriction flag is set in the Profile, all the Profiles
Individual Subscribers can only make Group Calls to the Groups
included in this table.
2) Group restriction:
If the Group Restriction flag is set in the specific Group SSI,
Individual Subscribers can only call the Group if it is included
in this table.
A maximum of 16 permitted groups can be setup.
NB: Leading zeroes of the User Number are not significant
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Group User Number (0000001..9999999)
PTT Permission
+: PTT allowed
-: PTT not allowed
SDS Permission
+: SDS allowed to Group
-: SDS not allowed to Group

21/..../GROUPPERM/......./ADD/./.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 17 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

21/nnnn/GROUPPERM/nnnnnnn/REM Remove Group Permission table entry


The Group Permission Table is used to give Individual Subscribers permission
to make Groups call to specific Groups.
By default Individual Subscribers can make Group Call to all Groups belonging
to Home and Associated Organizations independent of the permission in this
table.
Group Calls for the the Profiles Individual Subscribers can be restricted in
two independet ways:
1) Profile restriction:
If the Group Restriction flag is set in the Profile, all the Profiles
Individual Subscribers can only make Group Calls to the Groups
included in this table.
2) Group restriction:
If the Group Restriction flag is set in the specific Group SSI,
Individual Subscribers can only call the Group if it is included
in this table.
A maximum of 16 permitted groups can be setup.
NB: Leading zeroes of the User Number are not significant
Profile Number (0000..9999)
Group User Number (0000001..9999999)

21/..../GROUPPERM/......./REM

21/nnnn/CELL Display Radio Cell Restrictions


Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../CELL

21/nnnn/CELL/s Activate/Deactivate Radio Cell Restrictions


Profile Number (0000..9999)
Radio Cell restrictions
+: Activate (Only Permitted Nodes Allowed)
-: Deactivate (All Nodes allowed)

21/..../CELL/.

21/nnnn/CELL/nnn/ss..s Setup Radio Cell Permissions


Profile Number (0000..9999)
First Node Number (000..255)
Permission Flag
+: Mobile allowed on Node
-: Mobile not allowed on Node

21/..../CELL/.../..................................................

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 18 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

21/nnnn/VGNODE/n/nnn Setup Voice Gateway Node


Voice Gateway Nodes used of the Profile members.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
1: Primary Voice Gateway
2: Alternate Voice Gateway
Node Number (001..999, 000 for disabled)

21/..../VGNODE/./...

21/nnnn/PGNODE/n/nnn Setup Packet Data Gateway Node


Packet Date Gateway Nodes used of the Profile members.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
1: Primary Packet Data Gateway
2: Alternate Packet Data Gateway
Node Number (001..999, 000 for disabled)

21/..../PGNODE/./...

21/nnnn/POSUSERNO/n/nn..n Setup Position Destination User Number


Terminal Gateway sends Position Report to these Numbers
Profile Number (0000..9999)
1: Destination 1
2: Destination 2
User Number (1..9999999, blank or 0 for disabled)

21/..../POSUSERNO/./.......

21/nnnn/DNS/... Setup DNS Server IP Address


DNS Server IP Address given to the Mobile at DHCP Request
Profile Number (0000..9999)
IP Address (000..255 in each field)

21/..../DNS/...............

S21/nnnn/STFWDUSERNO/... Setup Store/Forward Center User Number


User Number for the SDS Store/Forward Center.
If the MS requests a valid number, this will be used instead.
All SDS will be forwarded directly to the end destination, if no
valid S/F-Center address is available.
Profile Number (0000..9999)
1..9999999: User Number of Store/Forward Center.
Used if a valid number is not received from
the MS.
Setting up the S/F-Center number here is
recommended.
Blank : MS shall provide the Store/Forward Center
number.
- : Store/Forward Center never used (SDS send
directly).

S21/..../STFWDUSERNO/.......

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 19 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

S21/nnnn/APPLSERVUSERNO/nn..n Setup Application Server User Number


User Number for the Application Server
Profile Number (0000..9999)
User Number (1..9999999, blank or 0 for none)

S21/..../APPLSERVUSERNO/.......

21/nnnn/DEL Delete Profile


Profile Number (0000..9999)

21/..../DEL

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 20 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

Subscriber Register SSI:


22 Display SSI Register Status
22

22/nnnnnnnn Display SSI


SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/........

22/nnnnnnnn/L/snn/nn Display SSI list


First SSI (00000001..16777215)
Line Offset (-50..+50)
Number of Lines (01..36)

22/......../L/.../..

22/USER/nnnnnnn Display User Number


User Number (0000001..9999999)

22/USER/.......

22/USER/nnnnnnn/L/snn/nn Display User Number list


First User Number (0000001..9999999)
Line Offset (-50..+50)
Number of Lines (01..36)

22/USER/......./L/.../..

22/IP/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Display IP Address


Only LSB's are significant
Address will be masked with Subscriber IP Address Segment Mask
Subscriber IP Address Segment value is added when displayed
IP Address (000..255 in each field)

22/IP/...............

22/IP/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/L/snn/nn Display IP Address list


First IP Address (000..255 in each field)
Line Offset (-50..+50)
Number of Lines (01..36)

22/IP/.............../L/.../..

22/TSI/nnnn:nnnnn:nnnnnnnn Display TSI


MCC of TSI (0001..1023)
MNC of TSI (0001..16383)
SSI of TSI (0001..16777215)

22/TSI/....:.....:........

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 21 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

22/nnnnnnnn/REG Display SSI Registration


SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../REG

22/nnnnnnnn/REG/GROUP Display SSI Attached Groups


SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../REG/GROUP

22/nnnnnnnn/ADD/c/... Add/Change SSI


User Number:
Leading zeroes are not significant
With all-zeroes User Number is disabled
IP Address:
Only LSB's are significant
Address will be masked with Subscriber IP Address Segment Mask
Subscriber IP Address Segment value is added when displayed
With all-zero significant bits IP Address is disabled
SSI of Mobile (00000001..16777215)
SSI Kind:
M: Mobile (Tetra)
R: DMR
Profile Number (0000..9999)
User Number (0000001..9999999)
IP address (000..255 in each field)

22/......../ADD/./..../......./...............

22/nnnnnnnn/ADD/c/... Add/Change SSI


User Number:
Leading zeroes are not significant
With all-zeroes User Number is disabled
SSI (00000001..16777215)
SSI Kind:
G: Group
E: Emergency
D: Dial-In
A: Application
T: Terminal
U: Unified
Profile Number (0000..9999)
User Number (0000001..9999999)

22/......../ADD/./..../.......

22/nnnnnnnn/DESCR/... Setup SSI Description


SSI (00000001..16777215)
Description

22/......../DESCR/........................

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 22 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

22/nnnnnnnn/HIDE/s Hide in Phone Book


This command allows the SSI to be hided in the Phone Book.
It can e.g. be used to hide SSI's with the Presentation Number setup
to point to a Unified Number. In this way only the Unified Number
is displayed in the Phone Book.
It can also be used to hide e.g. a Group Bridge etc.
NB: When "display all" is selected in e.g. the Dispatcher, all hidden
numbers are displayed.
SSI (00000001..16777215)
-: Always display in Phone Book
+: Hide in Phone Book (if in hide-mode)

22/......../HIDE/.

22/nnnnnnnn/PRESNO/nnnnnnn Setup Presentation Number


This command changes the presented number for outgoing calls.
It allows the Subscriber to present a different call-back number,
e.g. a Unified Number.
A call-back to the Unified Number will ensure all listed devices is
alerted.
NB: Only available for Mobile, DMR, Dial-In, Application and Terminal SSI.
NB: Leading zeroes are not significant.
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Presentation Number
0000001..9999999: Setup Presentation Number
0000000 : Clear Presentation Number

22/......../PRESNO/.......

22/nnnnnnnn/TSI/... Setup TSI


NB: Only available for Mobile and DMR SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
MCC (Mobile Country Code) (0001..1023)
MNC (Mobile Network Code) (0001..16383)
SSI (Short Subscriber Identity (0001..16777215)

22/......../TSI/....:.....:........

22/nnnnnnnn/TSI/- Clear TSI


NB: Only available for Mobile and DMR SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../TSI/-

22/nnnnnnnn/TRUST/c Change SSI Trust Kind


SSI (00000001..16777215)
N: Normal (fully trusted)
B: Blocked (no service)
V: Visitor (verified of SSI's Home Network)
U: Untrusted (auto-created)

22/......../TRUST/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 23 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

22/nnnnnnnn/PINCODE/cc..c Change PIN Code


PIN Code 1..9 digits, leading zeroes not significant
NB: Only available for DialIn, Application and Terminal SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
PIN Code:
1..999999999: Value
-: Disabled

22/......../PINCODE/.........

22/nnnnnnnn/TEI/... Setup TEI Terminal Equipment Identity


NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, Terminal and DMR SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
TEI (15 hex digits 0..9 or A..F)

22/......../TEI/...............

22/nnnnnnnn/TEI/- Clear TEI Terminal Equipment Identity


NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, Terminal and DMR SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../TEI/-

22/nnnnnnnn/SIM/... Setup SIM ID


ID of SIM Card if present
Shall be cleared if not used
If SIM ID is setup, SIM ID is used to find K in Key Register,
else TEI is used.
NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, Terminal and DMR SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
SIM ID (20 hex digits 0..9 or A..F)

22/......../SIM/....................

22/nnnnnnnn/SIM/- Clear SIM ID


NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, Terminal and DMR SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../SIM/-

22/nnnnnnnn/AUTHDIS/s Change Mobile Authentication Disable Flag


Note, that Authentication disable is not possible in mandatory
modes selected in the Profile register.
NB: Only available for Mobile, Application and Terminal SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Authentication Disable Flag
+: Disable Authentication
-: Authentication not disabled

22/......../AUTHDIS/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 24 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

22/nnnnnnnn/AIEDIS/s Change Air Interface Encryption Disable Flag


Note, that Air Interface Encryption disable is not possible in mandatory
mode selected in the Profile register.
NB: Only available for Mobile, Group and DMR SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Air Interface Encryption Disable Flag
+: Disable Air Interface Encryption
-: Air Interface Encryption not disabled

22/......../AIEDIS/.

22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/R Renew Security Set from Security Key


The Security Key will be search with the following references:
1) If SIM is setup, SIM will be used for Key search
2) Else if TEI is setup, TEI will be used for Key search
3) Else no renewal is done
NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, Terminal and DMR SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../SECSET/R

22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/... Setup Security Set


This command is for manual test only
Security set update should normally be done from Security Key
NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, Terminal and DMR SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Status
U: Unencrypted
E: Encrypted
RS (20 hex digits)
KS (32 hex digits)

KS' (32 hex digits)


9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 4
3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


22/......../SECSET/./..................../................................/....
............................

22/nnnnnnnn/SECSET/C Clear Security Set


NB: Only available for Mobile, Application, Terminal and DMR SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../SECSET/C

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 25 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPTIMEOUT/nnnnn Set Group Call Inactivity Timeout


Changes the time from last PTT released until Group Call termination.
Default value is 5 seconds.
NB: Only available for Group SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Group Call Inactivity timeout (00000..65000 seconds)

22/......../GROUPTIMEOUT/.....

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPNOKEYED/s Change Group Number Key-in permission


Allows the Group Number to be keyed in from the Keyboard.
When the MS makes a call with a Group Number, a PTP->PTMP Call Modification
will take place.
SSI (00000001..16777215)
-: Group Call via Keypad NOT allowed (default)
+: Group Call via Keypad allowed (PTP->PTMP)

22/......../GROUPNOKEYED/.

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPOWNERSHIP/s Change Group Call Ownership


Controls the use of Group Ownership for Group Calls
SSI (00000001..16777215)
-: Group Call Ownership not used (default)
+: Group Call Ownership used

22/......../GROUPOWNERSHIP/.

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPTEXT/cc..c Setup Group Text Line


Group Text Line to show on the Terminal Screen
NB: Only available for Group SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Group Text Line

22/......../GROUPTEXT/...............

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPRESTR/s Setup Group Call Restriction


Flag to restrict access to the Group.
When the flag is cleared the Group can be called from all Individual
Subscribers according to their Profiles restriction.
When the flag is set the Group can only be called from Individual
Subscribers with the Group included in their Profiles Group Permission
table.
NB: Only available for Group SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Group Call Restriction:
-: Normal Group restriction
+: Call only allowed if Group is included in
the Subscribers Group Permission table.

22/......../GROUPRESTR/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 26 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL Display Group Include Table


If the Group Include Table is enabled, a call to the group will also
include all Groups and Individuals in the Group Include Table.
NB: Only allowed for Group SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../GROUPINCL

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/s Enable/Disable Group Include Table


If the Group Include Table is enabled, a call to the group will also
include all Groups and Individuals in the Group Include Table.
NB: Only allowed for Group SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Group Include Table
+: Activate
-: Deactivate

22/......../GROUPINCL/.

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/nnnnnnn/ADD/s Add/Change Group Include Table entry


If the Group Include Table is enabled, a call to the group will also
include all Groups and Individuals in the Group Include Table.
Note that leading zeroes of the User Number are not significant
NB: Only allowed for Group SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
User Number (0000001..9999999)
Pre-empt Flag
-: Do not pre-empt call if busy
+: Pre-empt call if busy

22/......../GROUPINCL/......./ADD/.

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPINCL/nnnnnnn/REM Remove Group Include Table entry


If the Group Include Table is enabled, a call to the group will also
include all Groups and Individuals in the Group Include Table.
Note that leading zeroes of the User Number are not significant
NB: Only allowed for Group SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
User Number (0000001..9999999)

22/......../GROUPINCL/......./REM

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 27 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRF/c Change Call Transfer


NB: Only available for Mobile, DialIn, Application, Terminal and DMR SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Call Transfer Type
-: None
R: Not Reachable (Weak) (Not registered/no radio
contact)
A: No Answer (Medium) (Incl. Not Reachable)
B: Busy (Strong) (Incl. No Answer and Not
Reachable)
U: Unconditional (Always) (Excluding Blocked SSI)
N: Number Change (Always) (Including Blocked SSI)

22/......../CALLTRF/.

22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRFNO/cc..c Change Call Transfer Number


NB: Only available for Mobile, DialIn, Application, Terminal and DMR SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Number (0..9,#,*,+,p or w)

22/......../CALLTRFNO/..............................

22/nnnnnnnn/CALLTRFTIME/nn Change Call Transfer delay time


Used to change the Alerting time before Call Transfer takes place
for "Call Transfer at no B-answer"
NB: Only available for Mobile, DialIn, Application, Terminal and DMR SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Time in seconds (05..60, default 30)

22/......../CALLTRFTIME/..

22/nnnnnnnn/SUBREG/s Change Subscriber Register change permission


NB: Only available for Application SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Subscriber Register changes from Application
+: Permitted
-: Not permitted

22/......../SUBREG/.

22/nnnnnnnn/DISCREETLIST/s Change Discreet Listening permission


Controls the permission for Discreet Listening from the Application.
NB: Only available for Application SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Discreet Listening
+: Permitted
-: Not permitted

22/......../DISCREETLIST/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 28 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

22/nnnnnnnn/AMBIENCELIST/s Change Ambience Listening permission


Controls the permission for Ambience Listening from the Application.
NB: Only available for Application SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Ambience Listening
+: Permitted
-: Not permitted

22/......../AMBIENCELIST/.

22/nnnnnnnn/TEMPENDIS/s Change Temporary Mobile Enable/Disable permission


Controls the permission to make Temporary Enable/Disable of a Mobile
from the Application.
NB: Only available for Application SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Temporary Mobile Enable/Disable
+: Permitted
-: Not permitted

22/......../TEMPENDIS/.

22/nnnnnnnn/PERMDIS/s Change Permanent Mobile Disable permission


Controls the permission to make Permanant Disable of a Mobile from the
Application.
NB: Only available for Application SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Permanent Mobile Disable
+: Permitted
-: Not permitted

22/......../PERMDIS/.

22/nnnnnnnn/GROUPMAN/s Change Mobile Group Management permission


Controls the permission to change Group attachment and setup DGNA Groups
in Mobiles from the Application.
NB: Only available for Application SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Group Management
+: Permitted
-: Not permitted

22/......../GROUPMAN/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 29 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

22/nnnnnnnn/NUMBERMOD/s Change Number Modification Permission


Gives permission for the Gateway to present an external provided
number instead of the SSI's User Number.
Shall be set if the SSI is e.g. a Group Bridge or similar.
NB: Only available for Application and Terminal SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Number Modification Permission
+: Number Modification allowed
-: Number Modification not allowed

22/......../NUMBERMOD/.

22/nnnnnnnn/EMERGPRI/nn Change Emergency Number Call Priority


Sets the Call Priority of an Emergency SSI
This will overrule Call Priority request 1..14 from mobiles
Emergency Priority 15 and 16 from mobiles will always be passed unchanged
Call Priority 15 (Emergency Call Priority) is recommended for Emergency Numbers
NB: Only available for Emergency SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Call Priority
00 : Mobile Controlled
01..05: Low Priority (PTT Priority=0)
06..11: High Priority (PTT Priority=1)
12..14: Pre-emptive Priority (PTT Priority=2)
15 : Emergency Call Priority

22/......../EMERGPRI/..

22/nnnnnnnn/ICON/nn Change Icon


Controls the icon displayed on Clients for a Unified SSI
NB: Only available for Unified SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Icon
00: Unified
01: Emergency
02: Personal
03: Multi
04: External
05: GSM
06: PABX

22/......../ICON/..

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 30 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

22/nnnnnnnn/PRIORITY/nn Change Call Priority


Sets the Call Priority of a Unified SSI
This will overrule Call Priority request 1..14 from devices
Emergency Priority 15 and 16 from devices will always be passed unchanged
Call Priority 15 (Emergency Call Priority) is recommended for Emergency Numbers
NB: Only available for Unified SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Call Priority
00 : Device Controlled
01..05: Low Priority (PTT Priority=0)
06..11: High Priority (PTT Priority=1)
12..14: Pre-emptive Priority (PTT Priority=2)
15 : Emergency Call Priority

22/......../PRIORITY/..

22/nnnnnnnn/TARGET Display Target Table


NB: Command only available for Unified SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../TARGET

22/nnnnnnnn/TARGET/n/s/s/s/nn/cc..c Add/Change/Remove Target


Add, Change or Remove a Target Number for a Unified SSI.
NB: Command only available for Unified SSI
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Target Table index (0..7)
Voice Flag (+/-)
SDS Flag (+/-)
IP Flag (+/-)
Voice Call Delay Time (00..90 sec.)
Target Number (0..9,#,*,+,p or w)

22/......../TARGET/././././../..............................

22/nnnnnnnn/DEL Delete SSI


SSI (00000001..16777215)

22/......../DEL

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 31 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

Security Key Register:


25 Display Command function
25

25/nnnnnnnn/... Add/Change SSI Key


Used to Add/Change SSI Security Key
The Key is Scrambled automatically before it is sent to Key Register
Note: SSI shall be setup before Key is Added/Changed.
SSI (00000001..16777215)
Clear K key (Hex (0..9, A..F)

25/......../................................

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 32 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

Organization Register:
26 Display Organization Register Status
26

26/nnn Display Organization


Organization Number (000..999)

26/...

26/nnn/L/snn/nn Display Organization list


Organization Number (000..999)
Line Offset (-50..+50)
Number of Lines (01..50)

26/.../L/.../..

26/nnn/ADD/cc..c Add/Change Organization


NB: Command only allowed from Organization 000 Application
NB: All ranges automatically set to full range for Organization 000
Organization Number (000..999)
Description

26/.../ADD/........................

26/nnn/PROFNO/... Change Profile Number range


Limits the Profile Numbers, which can be added via an Application Gateway
Does not limit the range for an Organization 000 Application
NB: Command only allowed from Organization 000 Application
NB: Automatically set to full range for Organization 000
Organization Number (000..999)
Lowest permitted Profile Number (0000..9999)
Highest permitted Profile Number (0000..9999) (0=Barred)

26/.../PROFNO/..../....

26/nnn/SSI/... Change SSI range


Limits the SSIs, which can be added via an Application Gateway
Does not limit the range for an Organization 000 Application
NB: Command only allowed from Organization 000 Application
NB: Automatically set to full range for Organization 000
Organization Number (000..999)
Lowest permitted SSI (00000001..16777215)
Highest permitted SSI (00000001..16777215) (0=Barred)

26/.../SSI/......../........

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 33 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

26/nnn/USERNO/... Change User Number range


Limits the User Numbers, which can be added via an Application Gateway
Does not limit the range for an Organization 000 Application
Leading zeroes in User Numbers are not significant
NB: Command only allowed from Organization 000 Application
NB: Automatically set to full range for Organization 000
Organization Number (000..999)
Lowest permitted User Number (0000001..9999999)
Highest permitted User Number (0000001..9999999)
(0=Barred)

26/.../USERNO/......./.......

26/nnn/IPADDR/... Change IP Address range


Limits the IP Addresses, which can be added via an Application Gateway
Does not limit the range for an Organization 000 Application
Subscriber IP Address Segment value is added when displayed
NB: Command only allowed from Organization 000 Application
NB: Automatically set to full range for Organization 000
Organization Number (000..999)
Lowest permitted IP Address (000..255)
Highest permitted IP Address (000..255)
(0=Barred)

26/.../IPADDR/.............../...............

26/nnn/PUBLRESTR/s Change Publish Restriction flag


Restricts the publishing of the Organisation.
Setting this flag will hide the existence of the Organization for all except
Home Organization Applications.
NB: Command only allowed from Organization 000 Application
Organization Number (000..999)
Publish Restriction flag
+: Publish to Home Organization Applications only
-: Publish to all Applications

26/.../PUBLRESTR/.

26/nnn/NODERESTR/s Change Node Status Restriction flag


Restricts the publishing of Node Status.
Setting this flag will hide the Node Status in Applications.
NB: Command only allowed from Organization 000 Application
Organization Number (000..999)
Node Status Restriction flag
+: Node Status NOT sent to Applications
-: Node Status sent to Applications

26/.../NODERESTR/.

26/nnn/DEL Delete Organization


NB: Command only allowed from Organization 000 Application
Organization Number (000..999)

26/.../DEL

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 34 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

API Configuration Methods


30 API CONFIGURATION METHODS

30/CONFIG/GUI Open GUI Window


Method: ConfigOpenGuiWindow()
30/CONFIG/GUI

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 35 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

API Subscriber Register Methods


30 API SUBSCRIBER REGISTER METHODS

30/SUBSCR/GUI Open GUI Window


Method: SubscriberOpenGuiWindow()
30/SUBSCR/GUI

30/SUBSCR/USERNO/nnnnnnn Get SSI from User Number


Method: SubscriberGetSsiFromUserNo()
User Number (0000001..9999999)

30/SUBSCR/USERNO/.......

30/SUBSCR/IPADDR/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Get SSI from IP Address


Method: SubscriberGetSsiFromIpAddr()
Only LSB's are significant as address will be masked with Subscriber
IP Address Segment Mask
IP Address (000..255 in each field)

30/SUBSCR/IPADDR/...............

30/SUBSCR/ORG1/nnn Get Organization Record ver. 1


Method: SubscriberGetOrganizationRecord1()
Organization Number (000..999)

30/SUBSCR/ORG1/...

30/SUBSCR/ORG2/nnn Get Organization Record ver. 2


Method: SubscriberGetOrganizationRecord2()
Organization Number (000..999)

30/SUBSCR/ORG2/...

30/SUBSCR/PROF1/nnnn Get Profile Record ver. 1


Method: SubscriberGetProfileRecord1()
Profile Number (0000..9999)

30/SUBSCR/PROF1/....

30/SUBSCR/PROF2/nnnn Get Profile Record ver. 2


Method: SubscriberGetProfileRecord2()
Profile Number (0000..9999)

30/SUBSCR/PROF2/....

30/SUBSCR/SSI1/nnnnnnnn Get SSI Record ver. 1


Method: SubscriberGetSsiRecord1()
SSI (00000001..16777215)

30/SUBSCR/SSI1/........

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 36 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

30/SUBSCR/SSI2/nnnnnnnn Get SSI Record ver. 2


Method: SubscriberGetSsiRecord2()
SSI (00000001..16777215)

30/SUBSCR/SSI2/........

30/SUBSCR/REG1/nnnnnnnn Get Registration Record ver. 1


Method: SubscriberGetRegistrationRecord1()
SSI (00000001..16777215)

30/SUBSCR/REG1/........

30/SUBSCR/CMD/... Send Command to Master Subscriber Register


Method: SubscriberSendCommand()
Command

30/SUBSCR/CMD/................................................................

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 37 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

API Node Status Methods


30 API NODE STATUS METHODS

30/NODE/GUI Open GUI Window


Method: NodeStatusOpenGuiWindow()
30/NODE/GUI

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 38 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

Gateway Subscriber Register Command


51 GATEWAY SUBSCRIBER REGISTER COMMAND

51 Display Command function


51

51/D Display Last Command to Gateway


51/D

51/cc..c Send Subscriber Register Command to Gateway


Sends Subscriber Register Commands to the Gateway as done from the API
without any syntax check.
The Gateway accepts the 21/... and 22/... commands.
All commands can also be executed directly with the 21/... and 22/...
commands with syntax and permission checks in the DLL.
See also 20/QUE command for the API DLL.
See also S51/D command for the Application Gateway.
See also S50/D and S20/QUE for the Master Subscriber Node.
Command String (21/.. and 22/..)

51/.................................................................

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 39 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

CPU Performance:
66 Display CPU Performance
66

66/C Clear Peak Hold Times


66/C

66/T Display 1msec. timer


66/T

66/Q Display Query Performance Counter


66/Q

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 40 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

API DLL Configuration Commands:


70 Display last file save result
70

70/SAVE Save DLL API Configuration


Note: API DLL configurations is saved automatically
at any change
70/SAVE

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 41 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

General API DLL configuration:


71 Display General API DLL configuration
71

71/IDPROMPT/+ Prompt User for ID


71/IDPROMPT/+

71/IDPROMPT/- Use ID in configuration


71/IDPROMPT/-

71/USERNO/nnnnnnn Select/change Own User Number


Selects User Number as Application ID
NB: Leading zeroes are not significant
Own User Number (0000001..9999999)

71/USERNO/.......

71/SSI/nnnnnnnn Select/change Own SSI


Selects SSI as Application ID
SSI Short Subscriber Identity (00000001..16777215)

71/SSI/........

71/KEY/c/hh..h Add/Change Authentication Key


Used to Add/Change Secret Authentication Key
When an Unencrypted Key is entered, it is automatically Encrypted before it is
saved
This command will also change the Key Date/Time (except when reloaded from
Config File)
Encryption:
C: Unencrypted Key (used when the Key is Added/Changed)
A: AES Encrypted Key (used for Config File read-back)
Authentication Key (Hex (0..9, A..F))

71/KEY/./................................

71/KEY/- Clear Authentication Key


Used to Clear the Encrypted Authentication Key
This command will also change the Key Date/Time (except when reloaded from
Config File)
71/KEY/-

71/KEY/DATIM/hhhhhhhh Change Authentication Key Date/Time


Reserved command to remember the last Date/Time, when the Authentication
Key was changed.
NB:
This command is automatically changed in the Config File when the
Authentication Key is changed and should never be used manually.
71

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 42 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

71/NWAUTH/s Change Network Authentication selection


Used to control whether Authentication of the Network is done.
Network Authentication is enabled by default.
Network Authentication:
+: Enabled
-: Disabled

71/NWAUTH/.

71/PIN/PROMPT Prompt User for Pin Code


71/PIN/PROMPT

71/PIN/nnnnnnnnn Setup/Change PIN Code


PIN Code 1..9 digits, leading zeroes not significant
PIN Code (1..999999999)

71/PIN/.........

71/OMPORT/nnnnn Change OM TCP Port Number


Command to change the OM TCP listening Port
The default Port Number of the ApiDll is different from
the BSC to avoid conflict when running on the same PC.
When establishment of a connection is not possible,
change the port number in the Config.txt file directly.
Use the newest versions of the TetraOM program to allow
to setup the Port Number.
OM TCP Port (01024..65535, default 42382)

71/OMPORT/.....

71/OMPIN/nn..n Change OM PIN Code


Command to change the OM PIN Code
Used to protect OM access to DLL
Defaults to a pseudo-random 32 Bit value
The value zero disables PIN Code prompt
To be viewed and changed in Config.txt file directly
OM PIN Code (0..4294967295)

71/OMPIN/..........

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 43 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark API Application Gateway ApiDll ver. 7.76 help

Gateway configuration:
72 Display Gateways
72

72/n/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/... Add/Change Gateway


Gateway Number (0..9)
IP Address
Description

72/./.............../........................

72/n/- Remove Gateway


Gateway Number (0..9)

72/./-

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 44 of 44


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

Functional Description
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

All test commands for the TR412 Base Station Transceiver consist of a
2-digit command in the range 00 to 99 with an optionally parameter. Commands
without parameters are display-only commands and will not make any change
in the TR. Therefore, it is possible to "page through" the commands to find
the right one without any risk to change vital parameters.

The commands are divided into groups, covering the different functions in
the TR. For example, all the TX commands are in the 10 to 19 group.

If the first two characters are not representing a valid number in the 00 to
99 range, an error message will be displayed:

Invalid TR412 command

This is however not the case if the first character is a + , which are reser-
ved for commands to the test box. In this case no response will be sent.

If an unimplemented TR command is called, the following response is


displayed:

Unimplemented TR412 command

LOCAL BLOCKING MODE

After power-on, the TR always starts in normal operating mode. If a given


command requires local blocking, it is shown in the help for the command.
Commands that require local blocking are not available during normal
operation for operator interference. If a protected command is called,
the following response is displayed:

Local blocking necessary

Only commands with a parameter are will be protected. After activation of


local blocking (01+), all commands except factory configuration commands are
available.

PARAMETERS

Two types of parameters are used.

Generally + is used as parameter to turn on, enable or step up and - is used


as parameter to turn off, disable or step down.

For more complex functions, a / is used as separator after the command no.
followed by the necessary no. of characters for the actual function.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 1 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

If the parameter is not valid for the actual command, the following response
is displayed:

Invalid TR412 parameter

CONFIGURATION

Many calibration and system parameters are stored residently in a sector


of the Flash chip. At power-up and reset all settings are copied into the
workspace RAM, from where the different software tasks takes the settings.

Any change in the configuration is only made in the workspace RAM. To store
the new configuration residently, a save command shall be made.

The configuration is divided into two separate entities:

1) System configuration
2) Factory configuration

System configuration parameters can be changed with the 7x commands. To save


the system configuration resistently, the command "70/SAVE" shall be
entered.

Factory configuration parameters can be changed with the 9x commands. To


protect the operator from accidentially changing the factory configuration
parameters, an access lock is implemented, giving the following message:

Factory configuration unlocking necessary

To get access to factory configuration changes, it is necessary to enter


the command "90/FACTORYUNLOCK". Unlocking can be turned off again with the
"90-" command.

To save the factory configuration, the command "90/SAVE" shall be entered.

The resident configuration is restored into the workspace RAM at software


reset (02+) or local deblocking (01-) if re-booting take place.

LED description

The TR412 unit has 14 LEDS on its front plate with the following
arrangenent (note, that there can be differences on the fromt plate
print):

1+2..: PWR Y G TX
3+4..: TETRA G G MPT
5+6..: LB R R TX
7+8..: RFTL R R RX
9+10.: PCM R R DSP
11+12: HW R R ANT
13+14: H/E R R RM

The LEDs have the following meaning:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 2 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

1. PWR (yellow)
On:
Normal operation
Flashing:
Waiting for configuration from BSC
2. TX (green)
On:
TX keyed
3. TETRA (green)
On:
TETRA mode activated
4. NMT/MPT (green)
On:
Analog mode mode activated
5. LB (red)
On:
Local Blocking activated
Flashing:
Local Blocking requested
6. TX (red)
On:
TX PLL unlocked
VSWR protection circuit trigged
TX temperature protection is active (on at +85C, off at +83C)
+26V supply outside +/-2V tolerance
TX voltage reference faulty
7. RFTL (red)
On:
RF Test Loop output activated
Flashing:
Last selftest failed
8. RX (red)
On:
LO1 or LO2 PLL unlocked
LO1 level out of range
LO2 level out of range
9. PCM (red)
On:
12.8 MHz PLL unlocked (2.048 MHz missing from backplane)
36.864 MHz PLL unlocked (8 kHz missing from backplane)
1 sec. missing (from backplane)
Flashing:
Time message from BSC missing
TX not time synchronised
10. DSP (red)
On:
DSP watchdog alarm
11. HW (red)
Currently not used
12. ANT (red)
On:
TX Antenna L2 (blocking)
Flashing:
TX Antenna L1 (warning)

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 3 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

TX combiner TP alarm
13. H/E (red)
On:
Any of the external alarm inputs activated
14. RM (red)
On:
Both RX signal paths faulty
Flashing:
One of the two RX signal paths faulty

Individual alarm flags can be displayed with the 03 commands.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 4 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

Address commands
ADDRESS COMMANDS

A Display address
A

Ann Select address


1..4: Cassette number
1..8: TR (Transceiver)
a..d: PS (Power Supply)
A..B: TCC (TX Combiner Controller)

A..

A++ Forced address select


A++

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 5 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

General commands
00 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION

00 Display software version


00

00/A Display all software version numbers


00/A

Command description:

01 LOCAL BLOCKING/DEBLOCKING

01 Display Local Blocking selection


01

01+ Local Blocking conditional request


01+

01++ Local Blocking forced request


01++

01- Local Blocking off


01-

01/S Execute software reset


Local blocking necessary
01/S

01/H Execute hardware reset


Local blocking necessary
01/H

Command description:

02 TR OPERATING MODE

02 Display TR operating mode


02

02/c Change TR operating mode


Local blocking necessary
-: Test
N: NMT (analog)
T: TETRA (digital)

02/.

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 6 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

03 TR ALARMS

03 Display TR Alarm state


03

03/A Display Internal Alarms


03/A

03/B Display BSC Alarms


03/B

03/E Display External Alarms


03/E

03/C Clear TR alarms


03/C

03/L Display alarm latching selection


03/L

03/L/s Change alarm latching selection


Local blocking necessary
-: Disable alarm latching
+: Enable alarm latching (default)

03/L/.

Command description:

05 DISPLAY CONFIG/STATUS FROM BSC

05 Display Config/Status from BSC


05

Command description:

07 DISPLAY DATE AND TIME

07 Display date/time
07

07/S Display date/time status


07/S

07/T Display DSP TETRA Counters


07/T

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 7 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

Transmitter commands
10 TX KEY

10 Display TX key state


10

10+ Turn on TX
Local blocking necessary
10+

10- Turn off TX


Local blocking necessary
10-

10/T Display timeslot key


Only available in Tetra mode
10/T

10/T/ssss Change TX timeslot key


Local blocking necessary
Only available in Tetra mode
TS1 key (+,-)
TS2 key (+,-)
TS3 key (+,-)
TS4 key (+,-)

10/T/....

10/AUTO Display Auto TX-off mode


Only available in Tetra mode
10/AUTO

10/AUTO/c Change Auto TX-off mode


Has priority over control from L3
Only significant in Tetra mode without Local Blocking
Only available in Tetra mode
-: Controlled of L3
D: Automatic TX-off disabled
C: Automatic Carrier-off (TX-off if all Timeslots idle)
T: Automatic Timeslot-off (TX-off of idle Timeslots)

10/AUTO/.

Command description:

11 DISPLAY TX OUTPUT AND REFLECTED POWER

11 Display TX output and reflected power


11

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 8 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

Command description:

12 DISPLAY TX COMBINER TESTPOINT VALUE

12 Display TX combiner TP value


12

Command description:

13 TX OUTPUT POWER LEVEL SELECTIONS

13 Display TX output power selection


13

13/+nn.n Change TX output power


Local blocking necessary
The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command
The selected power is TETRA mean power on TR connector
Maxim Peak Envelope Power is 3.8dB higher
For NMT/MPT (analog PM) power is +3dB the selected power
For Test mode single tone, mean power is equal to Peak Envelope Power
For Test mode two-tone, mean power is -3dB of Peak Envelope Power
Output power selection
TR412 : 30.0 to 44.0 [dBm]
TR412H: 34.0 to 48.0 [dBm]

13/+....

13/MIN Change TX output power to minimum


Local blocking necessary
The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command
13/MIN

13/MAX Change TX output power to maximum


Local blocking necessary
The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command
13/MAX

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 9 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

13/RED/+nn.n Change Reduced TX output power


Local blocking necessary
Power setting for Reduced Power (Alarm Input 8 activated)
The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command
The selected power is TETRA mean power on TR connector
Maxim Peak Envelope Power is 3.8dB higher
For NMT/MPT (analog PM) power is +3dB the selected power
For Test mode single tone, mean power is equal to Peak Envelope Power
For Test mode two-tone, mean power is -3dB of Peak Envelope Power
Reduced Output power selection
TR412 : 30.0 to 44.0 [dBm]
TR412H: 34.0 to 48.0 [dBm]

13/RED/+....

13/RED/MIN Change Reduced TX output power to minimum


Local blocking necessary
Power setting for Reduced Power (Alarm Input 8 activated)
The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command
13/RED/MIN

13/RED/MAX Change Reduced TX output power to maximum


Local blocking necessary
Power setting for Reduced Power (Alarm Input 8 activated)
The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command
13/RED/MAX

Command description:

15 Display TX test modulation selection


15

15/ZERO Select zero modulation


I and Q DAC set to zero (with zero offset compensation)
15/ZERO

15/CW Select CW modulation


Power level analog-value of selected power (5/6 of pep)
15/CW

15/CW/PEP Select CW modulation PEP value


Power level is pep-value of selected power
15/CW/PEP

15/CW/IQ Display I/Q values for CW modulation


15/CW/IQ

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 10 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

15/CW/cs Select CW modulation


I: I DAC output
Q: Q DAC output
+: Positive DAC output
-: Negative DAC output

15/CW/..

15/CW/IQ/snnnnn/snnnnn Select CW modulation with I/Q values


NB: I and Q values are modified with power setting, I+Q offset
and quadrature settings before reaching the DACs.
I-value (-32768..+32767)
Q-value (-32768..+32767)

15/CW/IQ/....../......

15/DSB/c/n Select DSB modulation


I: I generated DSB modulation
Q: Q generated DSB modulation
2: 2.25 kHz
4: 4.50 kHz
9: 9.00 kHz

15/DSB/./.

15/cSB/n Select SSB modulation


L: LSB (Lower Side Band)
U: USB (Upper Side Band)
2: 2.25 kHz
4: 4.50 kHz

15/.SB/.

15/PRBS9 Select TETRA PRBS-9 modulation


15/PRBS9

15/PRBS15 Select TETRA PRBS-15 modulation


15/PRBS15

15/PH45 Select TETRA +/-45deg. modulation


15/PH45

15/FM/3 Select FM 1kHz +/-3kHz


15/FM/3

15/MULTI Select DSB multitone modulation


15/MULTI

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 11 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

16 TX FILTER

16 Display TX filter type


16

16/n Change TX filter type


TX filter type
0: TETRA 25kHz ch. spacing
1: Flat (for test)

16/.

Command description:

17 Display TX status
17

17/IQ Display TX IQ values


17/IQ

18 TX CARTESIAN LOOP COMMANDS

18 Display cartesian loop selection


18

18- Select open cartesian loop


18-

18+ Select closed cartesian loop


18+

18/P TX cartesian loop phase measurement


18/P

18/A TX cartesian loop phase/ampl. measurement


18/A

18/FREQ TX cartesian loop phase vs frequency measurement


18/FREQ

18/PWR TX cartesian loop phase vs. power measurement


18/PWR

18/ADJUST TX cartesian open loop phase adjust


WARNING: Factory adjust command, factory unlock necessary
Changes same parameter as the 91/PH0/snnn command
18/ADJUST

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 12 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

19 TX PLL/KEY COMMANDS

19 Display command function


19

19/F Select fast TX PLL loop


Local blocking necessary
19/F

19/S Select slow TX PLL loop


Local blocking necessary
19/S

19/FREQ Display TX PLL voltage vs frequency


Local blocking necessary
19/FREQ

19+ Switch TX on and off continuously


Local blocking necessary
19+

19/nnnn Switch TX channel continuously between current and nnnn


Local blocking necessary
TX channel number

19/....

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 13 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

Receiver commands
20 RX LO

20 Display RX LO status
20

Command description:

21 DISPLAY RX RSSI

21 Display RX RSSI
With 5 msec. settling time
21

21/c Display RX RSSI


RSSI option
0: 100 msec. settling time
1: 1 sec. settling time
Q: 5 msec. settling time without header

21/.

21/NF Display RX Noise Figure


Displays the RSSI value as equivalent Noise Figure
The reference depends on the actual IF filter
bandwidth, see the 26 command
21/NF

21/FFT/c Display FFT result


RX path:
A: RX-A
B: RX-B

21/FFT/.

21/FFT/c/2 Display 2.25kHz FFT amplitude results


Response is:
-nnn.n :-6.75 kHz [dBm]
-nnn.n :-2.25 kHz [dBm]
-nnn.n : 0.00 kHz [dBm]
-nnn.n :+2.25 kHz [dBm]
-nnn.n :+6.75 kHz [dBm]
RX path:
A: RX-A
B: RX-B

21/FFT/./2

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 14 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

22 RX DIVERSITY

22 Display RX diversity selection


22

22/A A-forced RX diversity selection


22/A

22/B B-forced RX diversity selection


22/B

22- Automatic RX diversity selection


22-

Command description:

23 RX ANTENNA TEST

23 Display command function


23

23+ RX antenna measurement command


23+

Command description:

25 Display RX test demodulation mode


25

25/PM Select PM demodulation


25/PM

25/FFT Select FFT demodulation


25/FFT

26 RX FILTER

26 Display RX filter type


26

26/n Change RX filter type


RX filter type
0: TETRA 25kHz ch. spacing
1: PM 25kHz ch. spacing (+/-7.5kHz)
2: PM 25kHz ch. spacing interleaved (+/-6.5kHz)
3: PM 20kHz ch. spacing (+/-6kHz)
4: PM 12.5kHz ch. spacing (+/-3.75kHz)
5: Flat (for test)

26/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 15 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

Command description:

27 RX SIGNAL DISPLAY COMMANDS

27 Display command function


27

27/ADC Display RX ADC signals


27/ADC

27/CP/c Display TETRA constellation points


RX path:
A: RX-A
B: RX-B

27/CP/.

Command description:

28 RX ADJUST COMMANDS

28 Display command function


28

28/LO Display LO1 injection


28/LO

28/PLL Display LO1 PLL voltage vs frequency


28/PLL

Command description:

29 SWITCH RX CHANNEL CONTINUOUSLY

29 Display command 29 function


29

29/F Select fast TX FS loop


29/F

29/S Select slow TX FS loop


29/S

29/nnnn Switch RX channel continuously between current and nnnn


Local blocking necessary
RX channel number

29/....

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 16 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

Response:
1) RX FS switch command 29 response
2) RX FS switch cont. 29/nnnn response

Description:
The 29+ and 29/nnnn commands starts a continuous switching b etween two channels.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 17 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

Common commands
30 CHANNEL COMMANDS

30 Display RX+TX channel numbers


30

30/nnnn Change RX+TX channel number


The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command
NB: Channel Number step size depends on factory settings (see 93 commands)
Channel number

30/....

30/R/nnnn Change RX channel number


The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command
NB: Channel Number step size depends on factory settings (see 93 commands)
RX channel number

30/R/....

30/T/nnnn Change TX channel number


The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command
NB: Channel Number step size depends on factory settings (see 93 commands)
TX channel number

30/T/....

30/R/nnnn.nnnnnn Change RX frequency


The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command
NB: Frequency range and step size depends on factory settings (see 93 commands)
Frequency [MHz]

30/R/...........

30/T/nnnn.nnnnnn Change TX frequency


The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command
NB: Frequency range and step size depends on factory settings (see 93 commands)
Frequency [MHz]

30/T/...........

Command description:

31 Display BSC signals and PLL status


31

32 Display RFTL selection


32

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 18 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

32+ Turn on RFTL high


Turns on output to -40dBr
32+

32/L Turn on RFTL low


Turns on output to -50dBr
Not supported in older hardware versions
32/L

32- Turn off RFTL


32-

33 PCM HIGHWAY

33 Display PCM highway selections


33

33/c/s PCM highway loopback control


When activated, the incoming timeslot bitstream is returned on
the outgoing timeslot.
TR timeslot number
1: TR timeslot 1
2: TR timeslot 2
3: TR timeslot 3
4: TR timeslot 4
A: All 4 TR timeslots
+: Activate loopback
-: Stop loopback

33/./.

Command description:

Highway timeslot numbers:


Pos: x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8
---- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
TS1: 00 04 08 12 16 20 24 28
TS2: 01 05 09 13 17 21 25 29
TS3: 02 06 10 14 18 22 26 30
TS4: 03 07 11 15 19 23 27 31

34 CMoIP

34 Display CMoIP status


34

34/C Clear CMoIP Downlink statistics counters


34/C

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 19 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

35 BLOWER

35 Display blower state


35

35+ Select forced fast Blower


35+

35- Deselect forced fast Blower


35-

Command description:
All blowers mounted below the TR cassette can run with two
speeds (except for backplanes from before 2001).

Under normal conditions, all blowers are running with slow speed.

When any of the mounted TR412 in that cassette exceeds the temperature
+60C, it will force the blower speed to fast speed.

When the temperature on that transceiver again drops below +55, it will
stop forcing the blowers to fast speed.

Fast blower speed can also be selected for test purposes with O&M
commands.

43 Display Timeslot status


43

43/CNTR Display counter values


43/CNTR

43/CNTR/C Clear counter values


43/CNTR/C

43/CONST/n/c Display constellation points


Timeslot number (1..4)
RX path (A or B)

43/CONST/./.

48 Display Message Trace


48

49 Display Tetra channel test selection


49

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 20 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

49/CHTST/nn/n Activate Tetra channel test


Uplink test point channel type:
07: TCH/7.2
08: SCH/F
09: STCH
10: TCH/2.4 N=1
11: SCH/HU
16: TCH/S
18: TCH/4.8 N=1
Downlink test point channel type:
57: TCH/7.2
60: TCH/2.4 N=1
66: TCH/S
68: TCH/4.8 N=1
Timeslot (1..4)

49/CHTST/../.

49- Stop Tetra channel test


49-

Command description:
The 49 commands control the TR412 build-in TETRA channel test features.

When channel test is activated, a test point at the output from the receiver
or alternatively at the input from the PCM highway is selected. Received bursts
including status will be send to the BSC via the HDLC bus, where BER/MER mea-
surements can be made with the F49 commands.

When channel test is activated, the TR412 TX switches to uplink mode and
generates the selected channel type. When TX is keyed and RFTL activated,
an RX input signal can be generated for the testing.

Alternatively, a test signal can be generated from an external source, e.g.


an R&S SMIQ or Anritsu signal generator

The uplink test point is intended for normal receiver channel tests.

The downlink test point is intented for test of received circuit mode traffic
transmitted via the PCM highway, and optionally an E1 connection and the
looped back. The signal can be generated on one TR412 and monitored on a
downlink
testpoint on another TR412 on the same or another BS.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 21 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

Test commands
60 DC VOLTMETER

60 Display DC test points


60

60/A Display all DC test points


60/A

60/nn Display specific DC test point


TP number (00..16)

60/..

60/T Display temperature


60/T

60/REF Display DC voltmeter reference voltage


60/REF

Command description:

Description:
The command displays the DC voltage on one of the xx DC test points.

The displayed reading is taken from a RAM register array, which is updated
every 24/1000 sec. Therefore, some delay can be necessary in connection
with automatic test equipment.

61 Display DSP state


61

61/CNTR Display DSP counters


61/CNTR

61/CNTR/C Clear DSP counters


61/CNTR/C

61- Stop DSP execution


Activates DSP hardware reset
61-

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 22 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

61+ Restart DSP


Makes:
1) Hardware reset on
2) Hardware reset off
3) DSP memory clear
4) DSP code installation
5) Interface register init
6) Program execution start
61+

61/+ Release DSP reset


DSP reset state necessary
Afterward, manual R/W can be done
61/+

61/B Boot DSP without execution


Makes:
1) Hardware reset on
2) Hardware reset off
3) DSP memory clear
4) DSP code installation
5) Interface register init
Afterward, manual R/W and program execution start can be done
61/B

61/R Start DSP program run


DSP booted state necessary
61/R

61/hhhhhhhh Display DSP memory word


DSP memory address (32-bit aligned hex)

61/........

61/hhhhhhh0/B Display DSP memory byte-wise


DSP memory address (hex)

61/.......0/B

61/hhhhhhh0/W Display DSP memory word-wise


DSP memory address (hex)

61/.......0/W

61/hhhhhhh0/D Display DSP memory doublewordwise


DSP memory address (hex)

61/.......0/D

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 23 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

61/REG/c Display DSP interface registers


D: DSP control/status registers
C: Radio calibration registers
R: Radio control registers
S: Radio status registers
M: Message queue registers
T: Tetra mode registers

61/REG/.

61/hhhhhhhh/hhhhhhhh Change DSP memory


DSP memory address (32-bit aligned hex)
Data to write (hex)

61/......../........

61/HPIC DSP HPIC read-back


61/HPIC

61/HPIA/hhhhhhhh DSP HPIA write/read test


Value to write to HPIA (hex)

61/HPIA/........

65 HDLC BUS MESSAGE QUEUE

65 Display command function


65

65/N Display next HDLC message


65/N

65/C Clear HDLC test queue


65/C

65/S Set HDLC test queue to start


65/S

65/s Message display suppress control


+: Display all messages
-: Suppress $0A, $0F, $33, $8A, $8C, $8F and $B3 messages (default)

65/.

65/ADDR Display HDLC queue addresses


65/ADDR

65/OWN Display OWN bits


65/OWN

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 24 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

65/BUF Display current HDLC descriptors


65/BUF

65/BUF/nnn Display HDLC descriptors


Ring descriptor index (000..127)

65/BUF/...

65/hhhhhhhh..hh Send HDLC message to BSC


Message in hex
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

65/..........................................................................

65/TST Display HDLC test variables


65/TST

65/TST/c Start/stop sending HDLC test messages


B: Send messages looped-back in BSC
I: Send messages looped-back in BSC IP stack
O: Send messages looped-back in other BSC
S: Send messages looped-back in BSS/SC
-: Stop sending messages

65/TST/.

65/TST/C Clear HDLC test error counters


65/TST/C

65/TST/nn/nnn/nn Change HDLC test message output parameters


Numer of messages send each time (01..99)
Send repetition time (001..999 msec.)
Payload length (00..99)

65/TST/../.../..

Command description:

66 CPU LOAD COMMAND

66 Display CPU load


66

66/C Clear max-counter values


66/C

66/LOAD Display random load value


66/LOAD

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 25 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

66/LOAD/nnnn Change random load value


Random load value (0000..9999)

66/LOAD/....

Command description:

67 INPUT/OUTPUT COMMANDS

67/LEDS Display LED state


67/LEDS

67/ADDRPORT Display address port


67/ADDRPORT

Command description:

68 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

68 Display command
68

68/DOWNLOAD Request program download from BSC


1) Mark download request in flash
2) Make hardware reset to enter download mode
68/DOWNLOAD

68/CHKSUM Display flash checksum


68/CHKSUM

Command description:

69 DISPLAY MEMORY

69 Display boot program version number


69

69/hhhh0 Display memory area


Memory address segment ($0000..$FFFF)

69/....0

69/D/hhh0 Display data segment area


Data segment offset ($0000..$FFF0)

69/D/...0

69/ADDR Display memory addresses


69/ADDR

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 26 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

69/IO/hhhh Display I/O Port


I/O Address ($0000..$FFFF)

69/IO/....

Command description:

Description:
The command displayes the contents of a memory area of the AM1 86CC microcontroller.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 27 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

System configuration
70 Display system configuration status
70

70/SAVE Save system configuration in flash


70/SAVE

70/CNFG Return system configuration


70/CNFG

71 Display TX settings
71

71/TCTP/n.nnn Change TX Combiner TP alarm threshold


TX Combiner TP alarm threshold (0.000..5.000VDC)

71/TCTP/.....

72 Display RX settings
72

72/PREGAIN/n.n Change RX pre-gain setting


RX pre-gain in dB (0.0..9.9, nom. 6.0)

72/PREGAIN/...

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 28 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

Factory configuration
90 Display factory configuration status
90

90/FACTORYUNLOCK Select factory configuration unlock


UNLOCK

90/FACTORY......

90- Deselect factory configuration unlock


90-

90/SAVE Save factory configuration in flash


90/SAVE

90/CNFG Return factory configuration


90/CNFG

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 29 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

TX factory configuration
91 TX SETTINGS

91 Display TX factory configuration


91

91/IZEROOL/snnnn Change TX Open Loop I-zero


DAC full scale is +/-32767
-9999..+9999

91/IZEROOL/.....

91/QZEROOL/snnnn Change TX Open Loop Q-zero


DAC full scale is +/-32767
-9999..+9999

91/QZEROOL/.....

91/LOOPGAIN/nnn Change Loop Gain


Used to reduce DAC output level at open loop
010..200

91/LOOPGAIN/...

91/QAMPL/n.nnnn Change TX Q-amplitude balance


0.9000..1.1000

91/QAMPL/......

91/QPHASE/sn.nnnn Change TX Q-phase quadrature


-0.2500..+0.2500

91/QPHASE/.......

91/PH0/nnn Select Cartesian Loop channel 0 phase adjust value


Channel 0 phase adjust value in degree (000..359)

91/PH0/...

91/PHS/snnn Change Cartesian Loop channel phase step value


Typical value:
400MHz: +090
800MHz: +050
Phase change per channel in millidegree (-999..+999)

91/PHS/....

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 30 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

91/MAXPWR/nnn.nn Change max. TX power setting


000.10..500.00 W

91/MAXPWR/......

91/PWR/n.nnn Change TX power setting


0.500..2.000

91/PWR/.....

91/PMOUT/n.nnn Change TX Power Meter output setting


Typical value for 60W PEP PA: 1.000
Typical value for 150W PEP PA: 2.500
0.700..3.500

91/PMOUT/.....

91/PMREFL/n.nnn Change TX Power Meter reflected setting


Typical value for 60W PEP PA: 1.000
Typical value for 150W PEP PA: 2.500
0.700..3.500

91/PMREFL/.....

91/ZERO Display TX carrier zero adjust table


91/ZERO

91/ZERO/nnn Setup TX carrier zero adjust table channel step


Value shall be max. channel number divided by 8
Normal value for 400MHz range: 100
Normal value for 800MHz range: 200
Number of channels between table entries (010..500)

91/ZERO/...

91/ZERO/n/snnnn/snnnn Setup TX carrier zero adjust table value


Table entry position (0..8)
I zero adjust value (-9999..+9999)
Q zero adjust value (-9999..+9999)

91/ZERO/./...../.....

91/ZERO/n/snnnn/snnnn/Q Setup TX carrier zero adjust table value (quiet)


Table entry position (0..8)
I zero adjust value (-9999..+9999)
Q zero adjust value (-9999..+9999)

91/ZERO/./...../...../Q

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 31 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

Common factory configuration


93 COMMON SETTINGS

93 Display common factory settings


93

93/CHSTEP/nn.nnn Change channel step size


Channel step size:
06.250: 6.25kHz
12.500: 12.5kHz

93/CHSTEP/......

93/CHRX0/nnnnnn Change RX channel zero


Value shall be (RX channel 0 frequency)/(Channel step size)
Values for 12.5kHz step size:
300MHz: 024000
350MHz: 028000
380MHz: 030400
410MHz: 032800
450MHz: 036000
805MHz: 064400
Values for 6.25kHz step size:
300MHz: 048000
350MHz: 056000
380MHz: 060800
410MHz: 065600
450MHz: 072000
805MHz: 128800
RX channel 0

93/CHRX0/......

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 32 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

93/CHTX0/nnnnnn Change TX channel zero


Value shall be (TX channel 0 frequency)/(Channel step size)
Values for 12.5kHz step size:
336MHz: 026880
360MHz: 028800
390MHz: 031200
420MHz: 033600
460MHz: 036800
850MHz: 068000
Values for 6.25kHz step size:
336MHz: 053760
360MHz: 057600
390MHz: 062400
420MHz: 067200
460MHz: 073600
850MHz: 136000
TX channel 0

93/CHTX0/......

93/CHIFOFS/snnnn Change 1st LO IF channel offset


Value shall be (1st IF frequency)/(Channel step size)
Typical value: -3600 for -45MHz
Values for 45MHz IF, underlying 1st LO:
12.5kHz step size: -3600
6.25kHz step size: -7200
1st LO IF offset (-9999..+9999)

93/CHIFOFS/.....

93/CHTCOFS/snnnn Change TC channel offset


Channel number offset between TX and Combiner
TX combiner channel offset (-9999..+9999, normal +0000)

93/CHTCOFS/.....

93/CHMIN/nnnn Change lowest used channel number


Normally set to 0000
Lowest used channel number (0000..9999)

93/CHMIN/....

93/CHMAX/nnnn Change highest used channel number


Values for 12.5kHz step size:
10MHz bandwidth (400MHz): 0800
20MHz bandwidth (800MHz): 1600
Values for 6.25MHz step size:
10MHz bandwidth (400MHz): 1600
20MHz bandwidth (800MHz): 3200
Highest used channel number (0000..9999)

93/CHMAX/....

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 33 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 34 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

Test circuit configuration


96 TEST CIRCUIT SETTINGS

96 Display Test circuit settings


96

96/DCVM/n.nnn Change DC Voltmeter calibration constant


Calibration constant (4.700..5.300, nom. 5.000)

96/DCVM/.....

96/THERM/snn.n Change Thermometer calibration offset


Calibration offset (-99.9..+99.9, nom. +00.0)

96/THERM/.....

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 35 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR412 Transceiver ver. 7.73 help

Hardware identity
98 HARDWARE ID

98 Display hardware ID
98

98/TYPE Display type number


98/TYPE

98/ITEM Display item number


98/ITEM

98/SER Display serial number


98/SER

98/VER Display version number


98/VER

98/REV Display revision number


98/REV

98/ITEM/cc..c Change item number


Item number

98/ITEM/...............

98/SER/cc..c Change serial number


Serial number

98/SER/........

98/VER/n.nn Change version number


Version number

98/VER/....

98/REV/n Change revision number


Revision number (0..9)

98/REV/.

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 36 of 36


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Functional Description:
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

All test commands for the TR421 Transceiver consist of a


2-digit command in the range 00 to 99 with an optionally parameter. Commands
without parameters are display-only commands and will not make any change
in the TR.

The commands are divided into groups, covering the different functions in
the TR. For example, all the TX commands are in the 10 to 19 group.

If the first two characters are not representing a valid number in the 00 to
99 range, an error message will be displayed:

Invalid TR421 command

If an unimplemented TR command is called, the following response is


displayed:

Unimplemented TR421 command

OPERATOR BLOCKING MODE

After power-on, the TR always starts in normal operating mode. If a given


command requires operator blocking, it is shown in the help for the command.
Commands that require operator blocking are not available during normal
operation for operator interference. If a protected command is called,
the following response is displayed:

Operator blocking necessary

Only commands with a parameter are protected. After activation of


operator blocking (01+), all commands except factory configuration commands
are available.

PARAMETERS

Two types of parameters are used.

Generally + is used as parameter to turn on, enable or step up and - is used


as parameter to turn off, disable or step down.

For more complex functions, a / is used as separator after the command no.
followed by the necessary no. of characters for the actual function.

If the parameter is not valid for the actual command, the following response
is displayed:

Invalid TR421 parameter

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 1 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

CONFIGURATION

Many calibration and system parameters are stored residently.


At power-up and reset all settings are copied into the
workspace RAM, from where the different software tasks takes the settings.

Any change in the configuration is only made in the workspace RAM. To store
the new configuration residently, a save command shall be made.

The configuration is divided into two separate entities:

1) System configuration
2) Factory configuration

System configuration parameters can be changed with the 7x commands. To save


the system configuration resistently, the command "70/SAVE" shall be
entered.

Factory configuration parameters can be changed with the 9x commands. To


protect the operator from accidentially changing the factory configuration
parameters, an access lock is implemented, giving the following message:

Factory configuration unlocking necessary

To get access to factory configuration changes, it is necessary to enter


the command "90/FACTORYUNLOCK". Unlocking can be turned off again with the
"90-" command.

To save the factory configuration, the command "90/SAVE" shall be entered.

The resident configuration is restored into the workspace RAM at software


reset (02+) or local deblocking (01-) if re-booting take place.

LED description

The BS421 has the following internal LEDs:

LED Color Marking Function


---- ------ ------- --------------------
D408 Yellow Pwr Power
D407 Green TX TX keyed
D406 Red Oper Operator Blocking
D405 Red RFTL RFTL activated
D404 Red TX TX Alarm
D403 Red RX RX Alarm
D402 Red CU Control Unit Alarm
D401 Red DSP DSP alarm
D400 Red Sync Sync Alarm

Individual alarm flags can be displayed with the 03 commands.

Boot Loader Reprogramming

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 2 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

The BS421 contains a Boot Loader in the on-board Flash.


The Boot Loader starts execution after Power-on or Hardware Reset.
The Boot Loader reads the Windows CE operation system contained in the
NK.bin file on the CF-Card into memory and starts its execution.
From version 7.30 the version of the Boot Loader is shown at TR421 startup
and with the 00/A command.
From version 7.30 the Boot Loader can also be reprogrammed of TR421.exe.
To update the Boot Loader, put the Boot.bin file in the root directory of
the CF-card (together with NK.bin) and restart the TR421.
The Boot Loader reprogramming will be shown on the screen at startup.
After the update the Boot.bin file shall be removed again to prevent
re-programming at every restart.
Warning: Do not turn off power of BS421 during update as this will
corrupt the BS421 Boot Loader!

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 3 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Software Version:
00 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION

00 Display software version


00

00/A Display all software version numbers


00/A

00/OM Display OM Connection status


00/OM

00/BSC Display BSC Connection status


00/BSC

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 4 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Operator Blocking:
01 OPERATOR BLOCKING/DEBLOCKING

01 Display Operator Blocking selection


01

01+ Operator Blocking request


01+

01- Operator Blocking off


Makes a restart of the TR421 service
01-

01/DEBUG Display Debug Commands Enable selection


01/DEBUG

01/DEBUG/+ Enable Debug Commands


NB: Should only be used of software developers!
01/DEBUG/+

01/DEBUG/- Disable Debug Commands


01/DEBUG/-

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 5 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Operating Mode:
02 TR OPERATING MODE

02 Display TR operating mode


02

02/c Change TR operating mode


Local blocking necessary
-: Test
A: Analog
T: TETRA

02/.

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 6 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Alarms:
03 ALARMS

03 Display Alarm State


03

03/A Display Alarm Flags


03/A

03/E Display BSC External Alarms


03/E

03/C Clear Alarms


03/C

03/LED Display LED State


03/LED

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 7 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

BSC:
05 BSC

05 Display BSC status/configuration


05

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 8 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

MAC Address:
06 NETWORK ADDRESSES

06 Display Network settings


06

06/MAC Display MAC Address


06/MAC

06/SYNC Synchronize Flash and Registry Settings


If Registry settings are valid, Flash is updated with Registry values,
else Registry settings are created from Flash values (if valid).
The synchronization is also done automatically at startup of TR421.dll.
The Flash mirror ensures, that Network Settings are not lost at update
of the WinCE Operating System (NK.bin), where a new registry i created.
06/SYNC

06/NAME/cc.c Setup Host Name


Sets the Windows CE Host Name.
The setting is saved in both Flash and Registry.
Recommended Name is "Nnnn-BS1-TRx", where nnn is Node Number and
x is TR number.
NB: Reboot of WinCE is needed afterwards (see 99/HWRESET command).
Host Name

06/NAME/...............

06/DHCP/s Setup DHCP


Sets to use DHCP or Fixed Addresses.
The setting is saved in both Flash and Registry.
NB: Reboot of WinCE is needed afterwards (see 99/HWRESET command).
DHCP selection
+: DHCP Server provides IP Address/Mask/Gateway
-: Manually entered IP Address/Mask/Gateway

06/DHCP/.

06/IPADDR/... Setup IP Address


Sets the IP Address.
The setting is saved in both Flash and Registry.
Recommended IP Address is 172.016.nnn.hhh, where nnn is Node Number
and hhh is 011..018 for TR1 to TR8.
NB: Reboot of WinCE is needed afterwards (see 99/HWRESET command).
IP Address (0..255 in each field)

06/IPADDR/...............

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 9 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

06/IPMASK/... Setup IP Mask


Sets the IP Mask.
The setting is saved in both Flash and Registry.
IP Mask shall normally be 255.255.255.000.
NB: Reboot of WinCE is needed afterwards (see 99/HWRESET command).
IP Mask (0..255 in each field)

06/IPMASK/...............

06/IPGW/... Setup IP Default Gateway


Sets the IP Default Gateway.
The setting is saved in both Flash and Registry.
IP Gateway shall normally be 172.016.nnn.001 (the VPN Router).
NB: Reboot of WinCE is needed afterwards (see 99/HWRESET command).
IP Gateway (0..255 in each field)

06/IPGW/...............

06/MAC/hh-hh-hh Setup MAC Address


Sets up the MAC Physical address of the Ethernet Port.
The 3 entered bytes are the least significant bytes.
The 3 most significant bytes are automaticalle set to
00h+0Fh+E3h, the OUI for Damm Cellular Systems A/S.
The value is setup in factory and should never be changed.
Shall be setup at change of Flash IC on Main Board.
NB: Reboot of WinCE is needed afterwards (see 99/HWRESET command).
NB: Command only available from Console.
Last bytes of MAC Address

06/MAC/..-..-..

06/10MBIT/s Change 10MBit/s Forced Flag


Forces the speed on the Ethernet Port to 10MBit/s.
Default value is 10MBit/s to allow for up to 150m LAN cable.
If the length of the LAN cable is less than 100m, the flag can be
cleared to allow autonegotiation to 100MBit/s.
Value is saved in Flash on Main Board
NB: Reboot of WinCE is needed afterwards (see 99/HWRESET command).
Ethernet Port 10MBit forced flag
+: Forced 10MBit/s
-: Autoselect 10/100 MBit/s

06/10MBIT/.

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 10 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Date/Time:
07 DATE/TIME

07 Display Current Local Date/Time


07

07/S Display Date/Time status


07/S

07/T Display DSP TETRA Counters


07/T

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 11 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

TX Key:
10 TX KEY

10 Display TX key state


10

10+ Turn on TX
Operator blocking necessary
10+

10- Turn off TX


Operator blocking necessary
10-

10/T Display timeslot key


Only available in Tetra mode
10/T

10/T/ssss Change TX timeslot key


Operator blocking necessary
Only available in Tetra mode
Timeslot 1 key (+,-)
Timeslot 2 key (+,-)
Timeslot 3 key (+,-)
Timeslot 4 key (+,-)

10/T/....

10/AUTO Display Auto TX-off mode


Only significant in Tetra mode without Operator Blocking
10/AUTO

10/AUTO/c Change Auto TX-off mode


Has priority over control from L3
Only significant in Tetra mode without Operator Blocking
L3 control is default
NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File
-: Controlled of L3
D: Automatic TX-off disabled
C: Automatic Carrier-off (TX-off if all Timeslots idle)
T: Automatic Timeslot-off (TX-off of idle Timeslots)

10/AUTO/.

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 12 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

TX Output Power:
11 DISPLAY TX OUTPUT AND REFLECTED POWER

11 Display TX output and reflected power


11

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 13 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

TX Current/Power consumption:
12 DISPLAY TX CURRENT/POWER CONSUMPTION

12 Display TX Current/Power consumption


12

12/P Display PA Power


12/P

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 14 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

TX Output Power selection:


13 TX OUTPUT POWER SELECTION

13 Display TX output power selection


13

13/+nn.n Change TX Normal Output Power setting


Normal TX Output Power in TETRA mode
This value is used if Alarm 8 input is not activated
For Test mode two-tone, mean power is 0.5 (-3dB) of Peak Envelope Power
For Analog Mode, the output power is 2 times the selected power
NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File
Normal Output power setting (27.0 to 40.0 dBm)

13/+....

13/MIN Set TX Normal Output Power to Minimum


Normal TX Output Power in TETRA mode
This value is used if Alarm 8 input is not activated
For Test mode two-tone, mean power is 0.5 (-3dB) of Peak Envelope Power
For Analog Mode, the output power is 2 times the selected power
NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File
13/MIN

13/MAX Set TX Normal Output Power to Maximum


Normal TX Output Power in TETRA mode
This value is used if Alarm 8 input is not activated
For Test mode two-tone, mean power is 0.5 (-3dB) of Peak Envelope Power
For Analog Mode, the output power is 2 times the selected power
NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File
13/MAX

13/RED/+nn.n Change Reduced TX Output Power setting


Reduced TX Output Power setting in TETRA mode
This value is used if Alarm 8 input is activated
Maxim Peak Envelope Power is 2.4 times (3.8dB) higher
For Test mode two-tone, mean power is 0.5 (-3dB) of Peak Envelope Power
For Analog Mode, the output power is 2 times the selected power
NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File
Reduced Output Power setting (27.0 to 40.0 dBm)

13/RED/+....

13/RED/MIN Set TX Reduced Output Power to Minimum


Reduced TX Output Power in TETRA mode
This value is used if Alarm 8 input is not activated
For Test mode two-tone, mean power is 0.5 (-3dB) of Peak Envelope Power
For Analog Mode, the output power is 2 times the selected power
NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File
13/RED/MIN

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 15 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

13/RED/MAX Set TX Reduced Output Power to Maximum


Reduced TX Output Power in TETRA mode
This value is used if Alarm 8 input is not activated
For Test mode two-tone, mean power is 0.5 (-3dB) of Peak Envelope Power
For Analog Mode, the output power is 2 times the selected power
NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File
13/RED/MAX

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 16 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

TX PA DC Bias:
14 TX BIAS

14 Display TX Bias
14

14+ Select TX Bias Forced On


14+

14- Select TX Bias Off (DSP Controlled)


14-

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 17 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

TX modulation:
15 Display TX test modulation selection
15

15/ZERO Select zero modulation


I and Q DAC set to zero (with zero offset compensation)
15/ZERO

15/CW Select CW modulation


Power level as in Analog Mode (5/6 of PEP)
15/CW

15/CW/PEP Select CW modulation PEP value


Power level is PEP-value of selected power
15/CW/PEP

15/CW/cs Select CW modulation


I: I DAC output
Q: Q DAC output
+: Positive DAC output
-: Negative DAC output

15/CW/..

15/CW/IQ/snnnnn/snnnnn Select CW modulation with I/Q values


NB: I and Q values are modified with power setting and I/Q-zero
and quadrature settings before reaching the DACs.
I-value (-32768..+32767)
Q-value (-32768..+32767)

15/CW/IQ/....../......

15/PRBS9 Select TETRA PRBS-9 modulation


15/PRBS9

15/PRBS15 Select TETRA PRBS-15 modulation


15/PRBS15

15/DSB/c/n Select DSB modulation


I: I generated DSB modulation
Q: Q generated DSB modulation
2: 2.25 kHz
4: 4.50 kHz
9: 9.00 kHz

15/DSB/./.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 18 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

15/cSB/n Select SSB modulation


L: LSB (Lower Side Band)
U: USB (Upper Side Band)
2: 2.25 kHz
4: 4.50 kHz
9: 9.00 kHz

15/.SB/.

15/FM/3 Select FM 1kHz +/-3kHz


15/FM/3

15/MULTI Select DSB multitone modulation


15/MULTI

15/PH45 Select TETRA +/-45deg. modulation


15/PH45

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 19 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

TX modulation filter:
16 TX FILTER

16 Display TX filter type


16

16/n Change TX filter type


TX filter type
0: TETRA 25kHz ch. spacing
1: Flat (for test)

16/.

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 20 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

TX status:
17 Display TX status
17

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 21 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

TX Cartesial Loop:
18 TX CARTESIAN LOOP

18 Display TX cartesian loop selections


18

18- Select open cartesian loop


18-

18+ Select closed cartesian loop


18+

18/P TX cartesian loop phase measurement


18/P

18/A TX cartesian loop phase/ampl. measurement


18/A

18/FREQ TX cartesian loop phase vs frequency measurement


18/FREQ

18/PWR TX cartesian loop phase vs. power measurement


18/PWR

18/LIN TX linearity measurement


Measures TX delta Gain and delta Phase
at output power change from +27dBm to +40dBm
18/LIN

18/ADJ TX cartesian open loop phase adjust


WARNING: Factory adjust command, factory unlock necessary
Changes same parameter as the 91/PH0/snnn command
18/ADJ

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 22 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

TX utility commands:
19 TX UTILITY COMMANDS

19 Display command function


19

19/F Display TX PLL voltage vs frequency


Operator blocking necessary
19/F

19+ Switch TX on and off


Operator blocking necessary
19+

19/nnnn Switch TX channel to nnnn and back again


Operator blocking necessary
NB: TX is turned on and off at both channels
TX channel number

19/....

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 23 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

RX Local Oscillators:
20 RX LO

20 Display RX LO status
20

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 24 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

RX RSSI:
21 DISPLAY RX RSSI

21 Display RX RSSI
With 5 msec. settling time
21

21/c Display RX RSSI


RSSI option
0: 100 msec. settling time
1: 1 sec. settling time

21/.

21/NF Display RX Noise Figure


Displays the RSSI value as equivalent Noise Figure
The reference depends on the actual IF filter
bandwidth, see the 26 command
21/NF

21/FFT Display FFT result


NB: Select RX-A or RX-B with the 25/FFT/c command
21/FFT

21/FFT/A Display FFT Adjust results


NB: Select RX-A or RX-B FFT with the 25/FFT/c command
Response is:
-nnn.n :-6.75 kHz [dBm]
-nnn.n :-2.25 kHz [dBm]
-nnn.n : 0.00 kHz [dBm]
-nnn.n :+2.25 kHz [dBm]
-nnn.n :+6.75 kHz [dBm]
21/FFT/A

21/FREQ Display RX Signal Frequency Offset


NB: Select RX-A or RX-B with the 25/FREQ/c command
21/FREQ

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 25 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

RX Diversity:
22 RX DIVERSITY

22 Display RX diversity selection


22

22/A A-forced RX diversity selection


NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File
22/A

22/B B-forced RX diversity selection


NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File
22/B

22- Automatic RX diversity selection


NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File
22-

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 26 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

RX Antenna test:
23 RX ANTENNA TEST

23 Display command function


23

23+ RX antenna measurement command


23+

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 27 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

RX-B Input:
24 RX-B INPUT

24 Display RX-B Input Selection


24

24+ Select RX-B input Cascaded


NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File
24+

24- Deselect RX-B input Cascaded


NB: This setting is saved in the System Configuration File
24-

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 28 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

RX demodulation mode:
25 Display RX test demodulation mode
25

25/PM Select PM demodulation


25/PM

25/FFT/A Select RX-A FFT demodulation


25/FFT/A

25/FFT/B Select RX-B FFT demodulation


25/FFT/B

25/FREQ/A Select RX-A Frequency Measurement


25/FREQ/A

25/FREQ/B Select RX-B Frequency Measurement


25/FREQ/B

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 29 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

RX IF filter:
26 RX FILTER

26 Display RX filter selection


26

26/n Change RX filter type


RX filter type
0: TETRA 25kHz ch. spacing
1: PM 25kHz ch. spacing (+/-7.5kHz)
2: PM 25kHz ch. spacing interleaved (+/-6.5kHz)
3: PM 20kHz ch. spacing (+/-6kHz)
4: PM 12.5kHz ch. spacing (+/-3.75kHz)
5: PM 6.25kHz ch. spacing (+/-1.9kHz)
6: Flat (for test)

26/.

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 30 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

RX Signal Display:
27 RX SIGNAL DISPLAY COMMANDS

27 Display command function


27

27/CP/c Display TETRA Constellation Points


RX path:
A: RX-A
B: RX-B

27/CP/.

27/ADC Display ADC peak-peak input levels


27/ADC

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 31 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

RX adjust commands:
28 RX ADJUST COMMANDS

28 Display command function


28

28/LO Display LO1 injection


28/LO

28/BPF Display RSSI vs. Frequency


Can be used for RX BPF adjustment
Uses TX + RFTL as signal source
28/BPF

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 32 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

RX utility commands:
29 RX UTILITY COMMANDS

29 Display command function


29

29/F Display RX PLL voltage vs frequency


29/F

29/nnnn Switch RX to channel nnnn and back again


Operator blocking necessary
RX channel number

29/....

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 33 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Channel/Frequency:
30 CHANNEL COMMANDS

30 Display RX+TX channel numbers and frequencies


30

30/F Display Hardware Frequency Range


30/F

30/nnnn Change RX+TX channel number


The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command
Channel number

30/....

30/R/nnnn Change RX channel number


The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command
RX channel number

30/R/....

30/T/nnnn Change TX channel number


The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command
TX channel number

30/T/....

30/R/nnn.nnnnnn Change RX frequency


The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command
Frequency [MHz]

30/R/..........

30/T/nnn.nnnnnn Change TX frequency


The setting is saved with the 70/SAVE command
Frequency [MHz]

30/T/..........

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 34 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Synchronization
31 OCXO SYNCHRONIZATION

31 Display Sync status


31

31/IN Display Sync Input status


31/IN

31/IN/c Change Sync Input selection


-: Auto Select
F: Forced Free Running
G: Forced GPS RX Lock
1: Forced External 1 Lock
2: Forced External 2 Lock

31/IN/.

31/SET Set OCXO Free Run adjust value to current DAC value
31/SET

31/SET/nn.nnn Set OCXO Free Run value


00.000 to 99.999 [%]

31/SET/......

31/SAVE Save OCXO Free Run adjust value in Flash


31/SAVE

31/PPS Display 1 PPS inputs


31/PPS

31/HIST Display OCXO Sync history


31/HIST

31/STEP/nn.nnn Simulate a PLL Frequency Step


00.000 to 99.999 [%]

31/STEP/......

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 35 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

RFTL:
32 Display RFTL selection
32

32+ Turn on RFTL Forward


32+

32/B Turn on RFTL Backward


32/B

32- Turn off RFTL


32-

32/nnn Select RFTL Forward Level


122 to 104 [-dBm]

32/...

32/ATT Display RFTL Attenuator value


32/ATT

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 36 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Duplex Filter:
33 DUPLEX FILTER

33 Display Duplex Filter Selection


33

33+ Select Duplex Filter


33+

33- Deselect Duplex Filter


To be selected during test, when no Duplex Filter is attached
Modifies the following item:
1) Disables channel range check against Duplex Filter limits
2) Disables RSSI compensation for Duplex Filter Loss
3) Disables RX Antenna Return Loss measurement compensation
for Duplex Filter Loss
4) Disables TX Power Meter compensation for Duplex Filter Loss
33-

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 37 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

CMoIP:
34 CMoIP

34 Display all CMoIP Connections


34

34/n Display one CMoIP Connection


Tetra Timeslot (1..4)

34/.

34/n/... CMoIP Multicast Connect


Tetra Timeslot (1..4)
Multicast IP Address

34/./...............

34/n/REL CMoIP Multicast Release


Tetra Timeslot (1..4)

34/./REL

34/C Clear CMoIP Downlink Statistics Couters


34/C

34/Q Display CMoIP DSP queues


34/Q

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 38 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

MAC
43 MAC

43 Display Command Function


43

43/TS Display Timeslot Status


43/TS

43/CONST/n/c Display Constellation Points


Tetra Timeslot Number (1..4)
A: RX A
B: RX B

43/CONST/./.

43/LMAC Display LMAC Message Statistics


43/LMAC

43/LMAC/C Clear LMAC Message Counter


43/LMAC/C

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 39 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

BSC Message Count:


47 BSC MESSAGE COUNT

47 Display BSC message count


47

47/C Clear BSC message count


47/C

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 40 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Message Trace:
48 MESSAGE TRACE

48 Display message trace


48

48+ Start Trace of all TS to UDP


48+

48- Stop Trace of all TS to UDP


48-

48/UDP/+ Activate trace output to UDP


UDP output counter will be cleared
48/UDP/+

48/UDP/- Stop trace output to UDP


48/UDP/-

48/UDP/nnn... Change trace UDP address+port


UDP IP address
UDP port number (default 42397)

48/UDP/.............../.....

48/FILE/+ Open trace output file


File will be cleared if existing
File output counter will be cleared
48/FILE/+

48/FILE/- Close trace output file


48/FILE/-

48/FILE/cc..c Change trace filename


File will be closed if open
NB: TR shall have write access permission to the file location
Filename (e.g. \CF-Card\Tetra\Work\Trace1.lan)

48/FILE/.........................................................

48/n/c Start/Stop Timeslot Trace


NB: If encryption is not used, the two Test Points are identical
Timeslot number (1..4)
Test Point
-: Stop Trace
U: Unencrypted (above UMAC encryption/decryption)
E: Encrypted (LMAC/UMAC interface)

48/./.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 41 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

48/C Clear Trace Counters


48/C

Command description:

The 48 Commands controls the the build-in Signalling Trace functionality.

For each of the 4 Tetra timeslots a testpoint can be activated to make it


possible to monitor Downlink and Uplink traffic p the Transceiver, either
below or above Air Interface Encryption.

The output from the Test Points can be output realtime in UDP messages, and can
also be written to a file, either on the BS421 or on a remote Computer.

The output can be analyzed with the Tetra Protocol Analyzer from fjord-e-
design.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 42 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Tetra Channel Test:


49 TETRA CHANNEL TEST

49 Display Tetra channel test selection


49

49/nn/n Activate Tetra channel test


Uplink test point channel types:
07: TCH/7.2
08: SCH/F
09: STCH
10: TCH/2.4 N=1
11: SCH/HU
16: TCH/S
18: TCH/4.8 N=1
Downlink test point channel types:
57: TCH/7.2
60: TCH/2.4 N=1
66: TCH/S
68: TCH/4.8 N=1
Timeslot (1..4)

49/../.

49- Stop Tetra channel test


49-

49/c Change Sync Mode


A: PRBS Auto Sync
M: PRBS Forced Multiframe Sync
T: PRBS Forced Timeslot Sync

49/.

49/CNTR Display Counters


49/CNTR

49/CLEAR Clear Counter Values


49/CLEAR

49/DATA Display Received Data


49/DATA

Command description:

The 49 commands controls the BS421 build-in TETRA channel test features.

When channel test is activated, a test point at the output from or input to
the receiver is selected. Received bursts including status will be analyzed
and BER/MER calculated.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 43 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

When channel test is activated, the BS421 TX switches to uplink mode and
generates the selected channel type. When TX is keyed and RFTL activated,
an RX input signal can be generated for the testing.

Alternatively, a test signal can be generated from an external source, e.g.


an R&S SMIQ or Anritsu signal generator

The uplink test point is intended for normal receiver channel tests.

The downlink test point is intented for test of received traffic from the
lines.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 44 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

DC Voltmeter:
60 DC VOLTMETER

60 Display DC test points


60

60/nn Display one DC test point


TP number (00..19)

60/..

60/T Display temperature


60/T

60/ADC Display voltmeter ADC values


60/ADC

Command description:

Description:
The command displays the DC voltage on one of the DC test points.

The displayed reading is taken from a RAM register array, which is updated
every 24/1000 sec. Therefore, some delay can be necessary in connection
with automatic test equipment.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 45 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

DSP:
61 Display DSP state
61

61- Stop DSP execution


Activates DSP hardware reset
61-

61+ Restart DSP


Makes:
1) Hardware reset on
2) Hardware reset off
3) DSP memory clear
4) DSP code installation
5) Interface register init
6) Program execution start
61+

61/B Select DSP Boot State


Makes:
1) Hardware reset on
2) Hardware reset off
Afterward, manual R/W can be done
61/B

61/S Select DSP Setup State


Makes:
1) Hardware reset on
2) Hardware reset off
3) DSP memory clear
4) DSP code installation
5) Interface register init
Afterward, manual R/W and program execution start can be done
61/S

61/R Start DSP program run


DSP booted state necessary
61/R

61/hhhhhhhh Display DSP memory word


DSP memory address (Hex 32-bit aligned)

61/........

61/hhhhhhh0/1 Display DSP memory 8-bit wise


DSP memory address (hex)

61/.......0/1

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 46 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

61/hhhhhhh0/2 Display DSP memory 16-bit wise


DSP memory address (hex)

61/.......0/2

61/hhhhhhh0/4 Display DSP memory 32-bit wise


DSP memory address (hex)

61/.......0/4

61/hhhhhhhh/hhhhhhhh Change DSP memory


DSP memory address (Hex 32-bit aligned)
Data to write (Hex)

61/......../........

61/REG/nn Display DSP interface registers


1st register to display (00..48)

61/REG/..

61/REG/nn/nn Display DSP interface registers


1st register to display (00..48)
Number of registers to display (01..48)

61/REG/../..

61/HPIA/hhhhhhhh DSP HPIA write/read test


NB: Bit 1+0 always read 0
Value to write to HPIA (hex)

61/HPIA/........

61/HPIC Display HPI Control Register


61/HPIC

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 47 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

CPLD:
62 Display CPLD version
62

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 48 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Internal GPS:
63 INTERNAL GPS

63 Display Internal GPS Status


63

63/VER Display GPS Module Version


63/VER

63/N Display next Internal GPS message


Hint: Use the C/63/N command to display continuously
63/N

63/SETUP Setup GPS RX Module


Setup the Internal GPS RX Module and saves the configuration in GPS RX flash
This command shall be executed when an GPS RX module is installed first time
63/SETUP

63/SEND/cc..c Send Command to GPS RX Module


This command is for testing only
NMEA command

63/SEND/....................................................................

63/RESET/s GPS RX Module Reset


This command is for testing only
GPS RX Reset:
+: Turn on reset
-: Turn off reset

63/RESET/.

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 49 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Message Test Queue:


65 MESSAGE TEST QUEUE

65 Display BSC Link Connection status


65

65/N Display next message


65/N

65/C Clear test queue


65/C

65/S Set test queue to start


65/S

65/s Message display suppress control


+: Display all messages
-: Suppress 70h+F0h messages (default)

65/.

65/c/hh/hh..hh Send message


Destination
0: Active BSC
1: BSC1
2: BSC2
ID of Message (00h..FFh)
Optional Data (hex)
0 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

65/./../..................................................................

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 50 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Host Performance:
66 HOST CPU PERFORMANCE

66 Display Host CPU task load


66

66/C Clear Host CPU Load Peak Hold


66/C

66/T Display 1msec. Timer


66/T

66/Q Display QPC Counter


66/Q

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 51 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Real Time Clock:


68 RTC NVRAM

68 Display RTC NVRAM


68

68/hh/hh Change RTC NVRAM


NVRAM Address [00..FFh]
NVRAM Data [00..FFh]

68/../..

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 52 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Host Memory:
69 HOST MEMORY

69 Display command function


69

69/hhhhhhhh Display Host memory word


Host memory address (Hex 32-bit aligned)

69/........

69/hhhhhhh0/1 Display Host memory 8-bit wise


Host memory address (hex)

69/.......0/1

69/hhhhhhh0/2 Display Host memory 16-bit wise


Host memory address (hex)

69/.......0/2

69/hhhhhhh0/4 Display Host memory 32-bit wise


Host memory address (hex)

69/.......0/4

69/hhhhhhhh/hhhhhhhh Change Host memory


Host memory address (Hex 32-bit aligned)
Data to write (Hex)

69/......../........

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 53 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

System configuration:
70 Display command function
70

70/SAVE Save System Configuration


File: \CF-Card\Tetra\Data\ConfigSys.txt
NB: From version 7.50 all changes are saved automatically
70/SAVE

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 54 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Common system configuration:


71 Display Common System configuration
71

71/ID/cc..c Change TR ID String


TR ID String

71/ID/................................

71/TRADDR/nn Change TR Address


TR Address (11..48)

71/TRADDR/..

71/MSGPORT/nnnnn Change Local Message Port Number


Local Message Port Number (00000..65535, default 42391)

71/MSGPORT/.....

71/BSC/n/s Change BSC Configuration


BSC number (1..2)
BSC Configuration Flag
+: Select BSC
-: Deselect BSC

71/BSC/./.

71/BSC/n/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Change BSC IP Address


BSC number (1..2)
IP Address

71/BSC/./...............

71/BSC/n/s Change BSC Connection Protocol


BSC number (1..2)
BSC Connection Protocol
U: UDP
S: TCP Server (BSC shall be Client)
C: TCP Client (Default) (BSC shall be Server)

71/BSC/./.

71/BSC/n/nnnnn Change BSC Remote Port Number


BSC number (1..2)
Port Number (00000..65535, default 42392)

71/BSC/./.....

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 55 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

71/CMOIP/BSS/s Change CMoIP to BSS selection


CMoIP Selection
-: CMoIP Multicast
+: CMoIP to BSS

71/CMOIP/BSS/.

71/CMOIP/BSS/n/nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Change CMoIP BSS IP Address


Active BSC number (1..2)
IP Address

71/CMOIP/BSS/./...............

71/TXREFLWAR/c Change TX Reflected Alarm selection


Can be set to avoid blocking alarm at poor TX antenna
Blocking Alarm:
Should normally be selected.
Will the TR with bad antenna out of operation
Ensures startup of MCCH on another TR
Warning-only Alarm:
Can be selected for single carrier systems
Can be selected if there is a risk, that all antennas
are bad (e.g. ice on antennas)
-: TX Reflected Blocking Alarm (default)
+: TX Reflected Warning-only alarm

71/TXREFLWAR/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 56 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Synchronization configurations
72 Synchronisation

72 Display Sync selection


72

72/MASTER/c Change Master Priority


Changes the Synchronization Priority for the BS
Master 1 shall be selected for the Primary Master in a cell.
Master 2 shall be selected for the Backup Master in a cell.
Master 0 shall only be selected if the BS is Global Master used to
synchronize other cells.
Warning: The Master selections shall be unique within a Radio Cell
0: Master 0 (For Global Master) (Highest Priority)
1: Master 1 (For Primary Master in a Cell)
2: Master 2
3: Master 3
4: Master 4 (Lowest Priority)
S: Slave

72/MASTER/.

72/CENTSECOFS/snnnnnnnnnn Change Century Second offset


Used to change the Century Second offset, where all TETRA counters started
For standard Damm TetraFlex this value shall be 0.
Century Second Offset
DAMM: +0000000000 [2000-01-01 00:00:00 UTC]
EADS: +0031536013 [1999-01-01 00:00:00 GPS]

72/CENTSECOFS/...........

72/CENTSECOFS/DAMM Change Century Second offset to DAMM


Used to clear Century Seconds offset for DAMM timing
Value: 0 for 2000-01-01 00:00:00 UTC
72/CENTSECOFS/DAMM

72/CENTSECOFS/EADS Change Century Second offset to EADS


Used to setup the Centrury Seconds offset for EADS timing
Value: +31536013 (1 year + 13 leap seconds) for 1999-01-01 00:00:00 GPS
72/CENTSECOFS/EADS

72/GPSRXOFS/snnn.n Change GPS RX offset


Used to change the GPS RX time offset
For standard Damm TetraFlex this value shall be 0.
GPS RX offset
DAMM: +000.0 [usec.]
EADS: +111.1 [usec.]

72/GPSRXOFS/......

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 57 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

72/GPSRXOFS/DAMM Change GPS RX offset to DAMM


Used to clear the GPS RX offset for DAMM timing
Value: +000.0 userc.
72/GPSRXOFS/DAMM

72/GPSRXOFS/EADS Change GPS RX offset to EADS


Used to setup the GPS RX offset for EADS timing
Value: -055.6 usec.
72/GPSRXOFS/EADS

72/IN/n/s Activate/Deactivate Sync Input


Input
G: GPS RX
1: Ext. 1
2: Ext. 2
Activate/Deactivate
+: Configured
-: Not configured

72/IN/./.

72/IN/n/... Setup External Sync Input


Input
1: External 1
2: External 2
Primary Flag
-: Not Primary Input (Normal)
+: Primary Input (For Remote Primary Reference only)
IP Address (000..255)
Cable Delay in usec. (000.0..999.9)

72/IN/././.............../.....

72/OUT Display Sync Message Output Table


72/OUT

72/OUT/... Add/Remove Sync Message Output


All units connected to the 1PPS output shall be added here
Max. 30 IP Addresses can be configured
Outputs are NOT active if Sync Slave Priority
IP Address (000..255)
Action:
+: Add
-: Remove

72/OUT/.............../.

Command description:

The TETRA Base Station TR's need to be time synchronized to operate correctly.

Most importantly, all TR's in a radio cell shall be time synchronized together
to

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 58 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

ensure correct timing for the mobiles, when switching from the control channel
to
a traffic channel on another TR.

For a multi-cell systems, all radio cells are also recommended to be time
synchronized together
to enable use of seamless handover (cell re-selection).

The Damm BS system is provided with a flexible system to provide


synchronization
between individual Transceivers. Build-in GPS Receivers give absolute time
synchronization to the radio cells. External Inputs can also be marked as
Primary
Sync References.

When a BS is Network locked, automatic frequency correction of the Master


Oscillator (RX and TX carrier frequencies) are provided, and Seamless Handover
to
other Network Synchronized Cells are activated.

The BS can be setup to run as either Sync Master 0..4 or Slave. The Masters
shall preferably be provided with GPS antennas or an External Primary Sync
source.
The remaining BS's shall be setup as Slave and do not need a GPS antenna.

The BS421 is provided with one External 1PPS (1 Pulse Per Second) output and
two external 1PPS inputs. The Slaves shall have their external 1PPS inputs
connected to Masters.

In addition to the hardware 1PPS, sync messages are send every second on IP
from the Masters to attached BS's.

A Master will indicate Master Mode, if:

1) Synchronized to the internal GPS RX or


2) Synchronized to an External Input marked as Primary and indicating
Master Mode

Master 0 priority:
1) Int. GPS RX
2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode
3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode
4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode
5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode
6) Ext. Master 1, Resync-only
7) Ext. Master 2, Resync-only
8) Ext. Master 3, Resync-only
9) Ext. Master 4, Resync-only
10)Int. Free-Run

Master 1 priority:
1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode
2) Int. GPS RX
3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 59 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode


5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode
6) Ext. Master 0
7) Ext. Master 2, Resync-only
8) Ext. Master 3, Resync-only
9) Ext. Master 4, Resync-only
10)Int. Free-Run

Master 2 priority:
1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode
2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode
3) Int. GPS RX
4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode
5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode
6) Ext. Master 0
7) Ext. Master 1
8) Ext. Master 3, Resync-only
9) Ext. Master 4, Resync-only
10)Int. Free-Run

Master 3 priority:
1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode
2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode
3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode
4) Int. GPS RX
5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode
6) Ext. Master 0
7) Ext. Master 1
8) Ext. Master 2
9) Ext. Master 4, Resync-only
10)Int. Free-Run

Master 4 priority:
1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode
2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode
3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode
4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode
5) Int. GPS RX
6) Ext. Master 0
7) Ext. Master 1
8) Ext. Master 2
9) Ext. Master 3
10)Int. Free-Run

Slave priority:
1) Ext. Master 0, Master Mode
2) Ext. Master 1, Master Mode
3) Ext. Master 2, Master Mode
4) Ext. Master 3, Master Mode
5) Ext. Master 4, Master Mode
6) Ext. Master 0
7) Ext. Master 1
8) Ext. Master 2
9) Ext. Master 3

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 60 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

10)Ext. Master 4
11)Int. GPS RX
12)Int. Free-Run

If no GPS synchronized Master or higher prioritized free-running Master is


available at re-start, Masters will try initially to synchronize to lower
prioritized free-running Masters.

A BS will resync automatically after a short time, if Century Second


and Phase Detector are out of sync with a valid sync source.

Masters shall be setup even if GPS antennas are not used and internal GPS RX
are deselected, to ensure proper synchronization between all TR's.

Typical 1-carrier BS421 configuration:


TR11: Master 1

Typical 2-carrier BS421 configuration:


TR11: Master 1
TR12: Master 2
TR11-OUT connected to TR12-IN1
TR12-OUT connected to TR11-IN1

Typical 3 o4 4-carrier BS421 configuration:


TR11: Master 1 (Powered of SB421-1)
TR12: Slave (Powered of SB421-1)
TR13: Master 2 (Powered of SB421-2)
TR14: Slave (Powered of SB421-2)
TR11-OUT connected to TR12-IN1, TR13-IN1 and TR14-IN1
TR13-OUT connected to TR11-IN1, TR12-IN2 and TR14-IN2

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 61 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Factory configuration:
90 Display factory lock status
90

90/FACTORYUNLOCK Select factory configuration unlock


UNLOCK

90/FACTORY......

90- Deselect factory configuration unlock


90-

90/CNFG Return current Factory Configuration


90/CNFG

90/FLASH Return Factory Configuration in Flash


90/FLASH

90/SAVE Save Factory Configuration in Flash


90/SAVE

90/CLEAR Clear Flash Factory Configuration


90/CLEAR

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 62 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

TX factory configuration:
91 TX SETTINGS

91 Display TX factory configuration


91

91/PWRADJ/n.nnn Change TX Output Power


0.700..1.400

91/PWRADJ/.....

91/BIASDR/nnn Change TX Driver Bias


000..255

91/BIASDR/...

91/BIASPA/nnn Change TX PA Bias


000..255

91/BIASPA/...

91/IZEROOL/snnnn Change TX Open Loop I-zero


-9999..+9999

91/IZEROOL/.....

91/QZEROOL/snnnn Change TX Open Loop Q-zero


-9999..+9999

91/QZEROOL/.....

91/LOOPGAIN/nnn Change Loop Gain


Used to reduce DAC output level at open loop
010..200

91/LOOPGAIN/...

91/QAMPL/n.nnnn Change TX Q-amplitude balance


0.9000..1.1000

91/QAMPL/......

91/QPHASE/sn.nnnn Change TX Q-phase quadrature


-0.2500..+0.2500

91/QPHASE/.......

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 63 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

91/PH0/nnn Select Cartesian Loop channel 0 phase adjust value


Channel 0 phase adjust value in degree (000..359)

91/PH0/...

91/PHSTEP/snnn Change Cartesian Loop channel phase step value


Typical value:
400MHz: +055
800MHz: +030
Phase change per channel in millidegree (-999..+999)

91/PHSTEP/....

91/ZERO Display TX carrier zero adjust table


91/ZERO

91/ZERO/nnn Setup TX carrier zero adjust table channel step


Value shall be max. channel number divided by 8
Normal value for 400MHz range: 200 (1600/8)
Normal value for 800MHz range: 400 (3200/8)
Number of channels between table entries (010..500)

91/ZERO/...

91/ZERO/n/snnnn/snnnn Setup TX carrier zero adjust table value


Table entry position (0..8)
I zero adjust value (-9999..+9999)
Q zero adjust value (-9999..+9999)

91/ZERO/./...../.....

91/PMOUT/n.nnn Change TX Power Meter output setting


0.700..1.400

91/PMOUT/.....

91/PMREFL/n.nnn Change TX Power Meter reflected setting


0.700..1.400

91/PMREFL/.....

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 64 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Common factory configuration:


93 COMMON SETTINGS

93 Display common factory settings


93

93/CHIFOFS/snnnn Change 1st LO IF channel offset


Value shall be (1st IF frequency)/6.25kHz
Typical value: -7200 for -45MHz
1st LO IF offset (-9999..+9999)
-45MHz: -7200

93/CHIFOFS/.....

93/CHRX0/nnnnnn Change RX channel zero


Value shall be (RX channel 0 frequency)/6.25kHz
RX channel 0
300MHz: 048000
350MHz: 056000
380MHz: 060800
410MHz: 065600
450MHz: 072000
805MHz: 128800

93/CHRX0/......

93/CHTX0/nnnnnn Change TX channel zero


Value shall be (TX channel 0 frequency)/6.25kHz
TX channel 0
336MHz: 053760
360MHz: 057600
390MHz: 062400
420MHz: 067200
460MHz: 073600
850MHz: 136000

93/CHTX0/......

93/CHTRMIN/nnnn Change lowest Transceiver channel number


Normal setting: 0000
Channel number (0000..9999)

93/CHTRMIN/....

93/CHTRMAX/nnnn Change highest Transceiver channel number


Normal 400MHz setting: 1600
Normal 800MHz setting: 3200
Channel number (0000..9999)

93/CHTRMAX/....

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 65 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

93/CHDFMIN/nnnn Change lowest Duplex Filter channel number


Normal value for 400MHz with 5MHz bandwidth:
Low band : 0000
High band: 0800
Normal value for 800MHz with 14MHz bandwidth:
Low band : 0000
High band: 0960
Channel number (0000..9999)

93/CHDFMIN/....

93/CHDFMAX/nnnn Change highest Duplex Filter channel number


Normal value for 400MHz with 5MHz bandwidth:
Low band : 0800
High band: 1600
Normal value for 800MHz with 14MHz bandwidth:
Low band : 2240
High band: 3200
Channel number (0000..9999)

93/CHDFMAX/....

93/DFTXLOSS/n.n Duplex Filter TX Path Loss


Loss in dB [0.0..3.0]

93/DFTXLOSS/...

93/DFRXALOSS/n.n Duplex Filter RX-A Path Loss


Loss in dB [0.0..3.0]

93/DFRXALOSS/...

93/DFRXBLOSS/n.n Duplex Filter RX-B Path Loss


Loss in dB [0.0..3.0]

93/DFRXBLOSS/...

93/SYNCEXT2/c Sync External 2 input selection


Shall be set according to actual hardware configuration
BS421 LAN Cable Second Out/In2:
A: Auto select
-: Out (Soldered jumper)
+: In2 (Soldered jumper)

93/SYNCEXT2/.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 66 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

93/GPSRX/c GPS RX Type selection


Shall be set to installed GPS Receiver type
GPS RX type:
2: iTrax02 (default)
3: iTrax03
6: IT600

93/GPSRX/.

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 67 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

Hardware identity:
98 HARDWARE ID

98 Display Hardware Identity


98

98/ITEM/cc..c Change item number


Item number

98/ITEM/................

98/SER/cc..c Change serial number


Serial number

98/SER/................

98/VER/cc..c Change version number


Version number

98/VER/................

98/REV/cc..c Change revisions


Revisions

98/REV/................

98/DFSER/cc..c Change Duplex Filter Serial No.


Duplex Filter Serial No.

98/DFSER/................

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 68 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2015-12-14
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TR421 Transceiver ver. 7.74 help

TR421 Control Commands


99 TR421 CONTROL COMMANDS

99 Display command function


99

99/STOP Stop TR421 service


Makes a normal shutdown of the service
99/STOP

99/RESTART Restart TR421 service


Makes:
1) Shutdown of TR421 Service
2) Copy of TR421.dll to TR421..dll
3) Startup of TR421 Service again
99/RESTART

99/HWRESET Make BS421 Hardware Reset


Uses Watchdog in RTC
99/HWRESET

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 69 of 69


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2011-08-18
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Functional Description
PS411 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

All test commands for the PS411 Power Supply consist of 2-digits in the range 00 to 99 with an
optionally parameter. Commands without parameters are display-only commands and will not make
any change.

If the first two characters are not representing a valid number in the 00 to 99 range, an error message
will be displayed:

Invalid PS411 command

This is however not the case if the first character is a + , which are reserved for commands to the test
box. In this case no response will be sent.

If an unimplemented command is made, the following response is displayed:

Unimplemented PS411 command

PARAMETERS

Two types of parameters are used.

Generally + is used as parameter to turn on, enable or step up and - is used as parameter to turn off,
disable or step down.

For more complex functions, a / is used as separator after the command number followed by the
necessary number of characters for the actual function.

If the parameter is not valid for the actual command, the following response is displayed:
Invalid parameter

SETTINGS

Calibration and system parameters are stored residently in the micro- processors built-in EEPROM. If
the programming succeeded, the following response is displayed:

Setting stored in EEPROM

If a failure during programming is detected, the following response is displayed:


EEPROM programming error

Warning: The any EEPROM byte is only guaranteed accept erasure and reprogram- ming up to 10.000
times. Do not use the O&M Continuous and Repeat commands here.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 1 of 14


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2011-08-18
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Address commands
ADDRESS COMMANDS

A Display address
A

Anc Select address


Cassette number (1..4)
Position number (a..g for posotion x1..x7)

A..

A++ Forced address select


Used to force UART address selection at factory test
NB: This command will not pass the BSC
A++

Command description:

Response:
1) Address: nc

Description:
The address commands are used to address the PS411

The 'A' command returns the PS411 address if the unit has previously been selected with a Anc
command.

The 'Anc' command selects the PS411 if nc both matches the address input pins. If match it returns the
address string.

The 'Anc' command deselects the PS411 if nc does not match the address input pins.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 2 of 14


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2011-08-18
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

General commands
00 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBER

00 Display software version number


00

Command description:

Response:
1) DAMM PS411 ver. 1.00

Description:
Displayes the software version number of the EPROM.

02 RESET

02 Display command function


02

02+ Execute software reset


Blocking necessary
02+

02++ Execute hardware reset


Blocking necessary
02++

Command description:

Description:
The reset commands are used to bring the PS411 back to a known state.

The 02+ software reset command forces the processor to start executing codes from the power-on reset
entry point. Complete initialization is made, except that blocking is maintained.

The 02++ hardware reset command will pull the CPU reset output low and make full hardware reset.
Note, that blocking will be off after hardware reset.

The hardware reset is made by stopping the trigging of the watchdog. Therefore 0.5 sec. will elapse from
the command until reset is made.

03 ALARM

03 Display alarm status


03

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 3 of 14


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2011-08-18
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

03/C Alarm reset


03/C

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 4 of 14


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2011-08-18
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Output commands
10 DISPLAY OUTPUT STATUS

10 Display output values


10

Command description:

11 14V OUTPUT CONTROL

11 Display 14V output selection


11

11- Turn off 14V output


11-

11+ Turn on 14V output


11+

Command description:

12 26V OUTPUT CONTROL

12 Display 26V output selection


12

12- Turn off 26V output


12-

12+ Turn on 26V output


12+

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 5 of 14


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2011-08-18
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Rectifier commands
20 Display Rectifier status
20

21 Display Rectifier selection


21

21- Turn off Rectifier


21-

21+ Turn on Rectifier


21+

22 Display Rectifier manual voltage control selection


22

22+ Select Rectifer manual voltage control


22+

22- Deselect Rectifier manual voltage control


22-

23 Display Rectifier output voltage selection


23

23/nn.n Change Rectifier output voltage


Rectifier output voltage (46.0..58.7V)

23/....

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 6 of 14


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2011-08-18
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Battery charging commands


30 BATTERY STATUS

30 Display battery status


30

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 7 of 14


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2011-08-18
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Test commands
60 TEMPERATURE

60 Display temperature
60

Command description:

63 TIMER

63 Display timer
63

Command description:

65 Display command function


65

65/N Display next message


65/N

65/C Clear test queue


65/C

65/hhhh..hh Send message to BSC


Message in hex
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5

65/......................................................................

65/L Enable loop-back reception


65/L

67 DISPLAY BOARD ADDRESS

67 Display Board Address


67

Command description:

69 READ MEMORY LOCATION

69 Display last selected memory address


69

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 8 of 14


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2011-08-18
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

69/hhhh Display memory address hhhh


Memory address ($0000..$0FFF and $2000..$FFFF)

69/....

Command description:

Response: Remark:
1) $hhhh=$hh Normal response
2) $hhhh=Protected $1000 to $1FFF address response

Description:
The command displays the content of a memory location. The I/O area $1000 to $1FFF is protected in
order not to disturb read handshake on I/O ports.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 9 of 14


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2011-08-18
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

System settings
70 SYSTEM SETTINGS

70 Display system settings


70

Command description:

71 AC INPUT

71 Display AC input selection


71

71s Change AC input selection


+: Select AC input
-: Deselect AC input

71.

71/EE++++ Save AC input selection in EEPROM


71/EE++++

Command description:

72 BATTERY CHARGING

72 Display Battery charging selection


72

72s Change Battery charging selection


+: Select Battery charging
-: Deselect Battery charging

72.

72/EE++++ Save Battery charging selection in EEPROM


72/EE++++

Command description:

73 BATTERY CHARGING VOLTAGE

73 Display Battery charging voltage selection


73

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 10 of 14


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2011-08-18
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

73/nn.n Select Battery charging voltage


Battery charging voltage at 25 Celsius
Shall be selected according to the battery recommendation
Typical charging voltage is 54.OV (2.25V pr. cell)
Charging voltage at 25 Celsius (52.8..55.2)

73/....

73/EE++++ Save Battery charging voltage in EEPROM


73/EE++++

Command description:

74 BATTERY CHARGING TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION

74 Display Battery charging temperature compensation


74

74/-nnn Select Battery charging temperature compensation


Shall be selected according to the battery recommendation
Typical temperature compensation is -72 mV/C (-3.0mV/C per cell)
Charging temperature compensation in mV (-048..-120)

74/-...

74/EE++++ Save Battery charging temperature compensation in EEPROM


74/EE++++

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 11 of 14


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2011-08-18
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Factory settings
90 FACTORY UNLOCK

90 Display factory unlock selection


90

90/UNLOCK Select factory unlock


90/UNLOCK

90- Deselect factory unlock


90-

Command description:

91 PS RECTIFIER SELECTION

91 Display PS Rectifier selection


91

91+ Select Rectifier included


91+

91- Select No Rectifier included


91-

Command description:

95 TYPE NUMBER

95 Display Item number


95

95/ccc..c Change Item number


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Item number

95/............

Command description:

Response:
1) Item no.: cccccccccccc

Description:
The commands are used to enter and display the item number.

The item number can consist of from 1 to 12 ASCII characters and shall be setup to be equal to the type
number on the type plate.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 12 of 14


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2011-08-18
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

96 TYPE NUMBER

96 Display Type number


96

96/ccc..c Change Type number


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Type number

96/............

Command description:

Response:
1) Type no.: cccccccccccc

Description:
The commands are used to enter and display the type number.

The type number can consist of from 1 to 12 ASCII characters and shall be setup to be equal to the type
number on the type plate.

97 SERIAL NUMBER

97 Display Serial number


97

97/nnnnnnnn Change serial number


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Serial number (00000000..99999999)

97/........

Command description:

Response:
1) Serial no.: nnnnnnnn

Description:
The commands are used to enter and display the serial number.

The serial number shall consist of 8 digits and shall be setup to be equal to the serial number on the type
plate.

98 VERSION NUMBER

98 Display Version number


98

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 13 of 14


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2011-08-18
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS411 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

98/cc..c Change Version number


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Version number

98/......

Command description:

Response:
1) Version no.: cccccc

Description:
The commands are used to enter and display the version number.

The version number can consist of from 1 to 6 ASCII characters and shall be setup to be equal to the
version number on the type plate.

99 REVISION NUMBER

99 Display Revision number


99

99/cc..c Change Revision number


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Revision number

99/......

Command description:

Response:
1) Revision no.: cccccc

Description:
The commands are used to enter and display the revision number.

The revision number can consist of from 1 to 6 ASCII characters and shall be setup to be equal to the
revision number on the type plate.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 14 of 14


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Functional Description
PS421 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

All test commands for the PS421 Power Supply consist of 2-digit commands
in the range 00 to 99 with an optionally parameter. Commands without parameters
are display-only commands and will not make any change.

If the first two characters are not representing a valid number in


the 00 to 99 range, an error message will be displayed:

Invalid PS421 command

If an unimplemented command is executed, the following response is


displayed:

Unimplemented PS421 command

PARAMETERS

Two types of parameters are used.

Generally + is used as parameter to turn on, enable or step up and - is used


as parameter to turn off, disable or step down.

For more complex functions, a / is used as separator after the command


number followed by the necessary number of characters for the actual
function.

If the parameter is not valid for the actual command, the following response
is displayed:
Invalid parameter

SYSTEM AND FACTORY CONFIGURATIONS

The System and Factory Configurations are stored residently in the


microcontrollers
built-in Flash memory and read into RAM at power-up. The settings are changed
with
the 7x and 9x commands respectively and will becone effective immediately. The
changes
shall be saved with the 70/SAVE and 90/SAVE commands to be effective after a
re-boot.

To avoid accidentially change of Factory settings, change access is only


possible
after the Factory Unlock command 90/UNLOCK

Warning: The Flash is only guaranteed to be erasured and reprogrammed 10.000


times.
Do not use the O&M Continuous or Repeat commands here.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 1 of 9


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

General commands
00 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBER

00 Display software version number


00

Command description:

Response:
1) PS421 ver. 1.00

Description:
Displayes the software version number of the Flash.

02 RESET

02 Display command function


02

02+ Execute hardware reset


02+

Command description:

03 ALARMS

03 Display alarm flags


03

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 2 of 9


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

PS commands
10 DISPLAY PS STATUS

10 Display PS Status
10

Command description:

11 TR1/TR3 POWER-OFF

11 Display TR1/TR3 Power-Off Selection


For SB421 #1: TR1
For SB421 #2: TR3
11

11+ Turn On TR1/TR3 Power


For SB421 #1: TR1
For SB421 #2: TR3
11+

11- Turn Off TR1/TR3 Power


For SB421 #1: TR1
For SB421 #2: TR3
11-

Command description:

12 TR2/TR4 POWER-OFF

12 Display TR2/TR4 Power-Off Selection


For SB421 #1: TR2
For SB421 #2: TR4
12

12+ Turn On TR2/TR4 Power


For SB421 #1: TR2
For SB421 #2: TR4
12+

12- Turn Off TR2/TR4 Power


For SB421 #1: TR2
For SB421 #2: TR4
12-

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 3 of 9


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Rectifier commands
20 Display Rectifier status
20

21 Display Rectifier Off selection


21

21- Turn Off Rectifier


21-

21+ Turn On Rectifier


21+

22 Display Rectifier Manual Voltage Control selection


22

22+ Select Rectifer Manual Voltage Control


22+

22- Deselect Rectifier Manual Voltage Control


22-

23 Display Rectifier Output Voltage selection


23

23/nn.n Change Rectifier Output Voltage


Rectifier Output Voltage (48.0..59.0V)

23/....

24 Display Battery Super Charge Status


24

24/n.n/nnn Start Battery Super Charge


Command used to Charge Align Cells in Battery
Is recommended to do on a new Battery and once every year
Parameters shall be according to recommandation for Battery type
Do not use on small Batteries, if they are not able to handle continuous
charge with the max. output current of PS421.
Charge Voltage Increase (0.1V to 4.8V)(2.4V typ.)
Charge duration (001 to 999 minutes)

24/.../...

24- Stop Battery Super Charge


24-

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 4 of 9


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Test commands
60 ADC VOLTMETER

60 Display ADC Result


60

Command description:

67 INPUT PORT

67 Display Input Port


Spare Input Port from Control Connector
67

Command description:

68 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD

68 Display command function


68

68/BOOT Switch to Boot Mode


This Command sets the Program Update Request Flag and afterwards makes a
hardware reset of the Microcontroller. Afterwards the Microcontroller can
accept new download of new Program Code.
Download of new Program Code can either be done automatically from BSC421
or by executing the HEX file in the Editor of the TetraOM Program.
BOOT

68/....

Command description:

69 READ MEMORY LOCATION

69 Display last selected memory address


69

69/hhhh Display memory address hhhh


Memory address in HEX

69/....

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 5 of 9


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

System Configuration
70 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

70 Display System Configuration


70

70/SAVE Save System Configuration in Flash


70/SAVE

Command description:

71 AC INPUT

71 Display AC input selection


71

71s Change AC input selection


+: Select AC input
-: Deselect AC input

71.

Command description:

72 BATTERY CHARGING

72 Display Battery charging selection


72

72s Change Battery charging selection


+: Select Battery charging
-: Deselect Battery charging

72.

Command description:

73 BATTERY CHARGING VOLTAGE

73 Display Battery charging voltage selection


73

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 6 of 9


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

73/nn.n Select Battery charging voltage


Battery charging voltage at 25 Celsius
Shall be selected according to the battery recommendation
Typical charging voltage is 54.OV (2.25V pr. cell)
Charging voltage at 25 Celsius (52.8..55.2)

73/....

Command description:

74 BATTERY CHARGING TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION

74 Display Battery charging temperature compensation


74

74/-nnn Select Battery charging temperature compensation


Shall be selected according to the battery recommendation
Typical temperature compensation is -72 mV/C (-3.0mV/C per cell)
Charging temperature compensation in mV (-048..-120)

74/-...

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 7 of 9


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

Factory Configuration
90 FACTORY CONFIGURATION

90 Display Factory Configuration


90

90/D Display factory unlock selection


90/D

90/UNLOCK Select factory unlock


90/UNLOCK

90- Deselect factory unlock


90-

90/SAVE Save Factory Configuration in Flash


90/SAVE

Command description:

91 RECTIFIER SELECTION

91 Display Rectifier selection


91

91+ Select Rectifier included


Factory Unlock necessary
91+

91- Select No Rectifier included


Factory Unlock necessary
91-

Command description:

95 TYPE NUMBER

95 Display Item Number


95

95/ccc..c Change Item Number


Factory Unlock necessary
Item Number

95/............

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 8 of 9


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark PS421 Power Supply ver. 1.00 help

96 TYPE NUMBER

96 Display Type Number


96

96/ccc..c Change Type Number


Factory Unlock necessary
Type Number

96/............

Command description:

97 SERIAL NUMBER

97 Display Serial Number


97

97/nnnnnnnn Change Serial Number


Factory Unlock necessary
Serial Number (00000000..99999999)

97/........

Command description:

98 VERSION NUMBER

98 Display Version Number


98

98/cc..c Change Version Number


Factory Unlock necessary
Version Number

98/......

Command description:

99 REVISION NUMBER

99 Display Revision Number


99

99/cc..c Change Revision Number


Factory Unlock necessary
Revision Number

99/......

Command description:

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 9 of 9


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Functional Description
TCC411 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

All test commands for the TCC411 Transmitter Combiner Controller consist of 2-digits in the range 00
to 99 with an optionally parameter. Commands without parameters are display-only commands and will
not make any change.

If the first two characters are not representing a valid number in the 00 to 99 range, an error message
will be displayed:

Invalid TCC411 command

This is however not the case if the first character is a + , which are reser- ved for commands to the test
box. In this case no response will be sent.

If an unimplemented command is made, the following response is displayed:

Unimplemented TCC411 command

BLOCKING

After power-on, the TCC411 starts up in normal operating mode. Some commands requires blocking to
be available. If blocking has not been done,the follow- ing response is displayed:

Blocking necessary

Only commands with a parameter are protected. After activation of local blocking (01+), all the
commands are available, except calibration commands.

If a calibration command is executed and calibration unlock has not been done, the following response is
displayed:

Calibration unlock necessary

PARAMETERS

Two types of parameters are used.

Generally + is used as parameter to turn on, enable or step up and - is used as parameter to turn off,
disable or step down.

For more complex functions, a / is used as separator after the command number followed by the
necessary number of characters for the actual function.

If the parameter is not valid for the actual command, the following response is displayed:
Invalid parameter

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 1 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

SETTINGS

Calibration and system parameters are stored residently in the micro- processors built-in EEPROM. If
the programming succeeded, the following response is displayed:

Setting stored in EEPROM

If a failure during programming is detected, the following response is displayed:


EEPROM programming error

Warning: The any EEPROM byte is only guaranteed accept erasure and reprogram- ming up to 10.000
times. Do not use the O&M Continuous and Repeat commands here.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 2 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Address commands
ADDRESS COMMANDS

A Display address
A

Anc Select address


TR Cassette number (1..4)
TX combiner module
A: TC for position 1..4
B: TC for position 5..8

A..

Command description:

Response:
1) Address: nc

Description:
The address commands are used to address the TCC411

The 'A' command returns the TCC411 address if the unit has previously been selected with a Anc
command.

The 'Anc' command selects the TCC411 if nc both matches the address input pins coming in the cable
from the transceiver cassette. If match it returns the address string.

The 'Anc' command deselects the TCC411 if nc does not match the address input pins.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 3 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

General commands
00 DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBER

00 Display software version number


00

Command description:

Response:
1) DAMM TCC411 ver. 2.00

Description:
Displayes the software version number of the EPROM.

01 BLOCKING/DEBLOCKING

01 Display blocking state


01

01+ Make blocking


01+

01- Make deblocking


01-

Command description:

Response:
1) Blocking: Off
2) Blocking: On
3) Deblocking executed

Description:
The commands are used to make operator blocking and deblocking of the TCC411. During normal
operation, the combiner units are controlled from the connected transceivers and the TCC411 is
protected against operator commands changing the frequencies. When operator blocking is made, the
combiner is not longer controlled from the transceiver and full operator control is possible.

The 01+ and 01- commands have no effect, if the states are already present. If local deblocking 01- is
selected from On, a software reset sequence equivalent to the power-on reset sequence is executed.

Never leave the TCC411 in blocked state!!!

02 TCC RESET

02 Display command function


02

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 4 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

02+ Execute software reset


Blocking necessary
02+

02++ Execute hardware reset


Blocking necessary
02++

Command description:

Response: Remark:
1) Reset commands 02 response
2) Software reset executed 02+ response
3) Hardware reset executed 02++ response

Description:
The reset commands are used to bring the TCC411 back to a known state.

The 02+ software reset command forces the processor to start executing codes from the power-on reset
entry point. Complete initialization is made, except that blocking is maintained.

The 02++ hardware reset command will pull the CPU reset output low and make full hardware reset.
Note, that blocking will be off after hardware reset.

The hardware reset is made by stopping the trigging of the watchdog. Therefore 0.5 sec. will elapse from
the command until reset is made.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 5 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Combiner control commands


10 CHANNEL NUMBER

10 Display frequencies
10

10/n Display frequency


Combiner number (1..4)

10/.

10/n/+ Step up one channel


Blocking necessary
Combiner number (1..4)

10/./+

10/n/- Step down one channel


Blocking necessary
Combiner number (1..4)

10/./-

10/n/nnnn Change channel no.


Blocking necessary
Combiner number (1..4)
Channel number (0000..9999)

10/./....

10/n/E Go to end stop


Blocking necessary
Combiner number (1..4)

10/./E

10/n/EE++++ Save channel no. in EEPROM


Blocking necessary
Combiner number (1..4)
++++

10/./EE....

Command description:

Response: Remark:
1) TC1: 0246 463.0750 0727 10 response
TC2: 0260 463.2500 0760
TC3: 0274 463.4250 0747
TC4: 0288 463.6000 0755
2) TC2: 0260 463.2500 0760 10/n response

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 6 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

3) TC2: 0261 463.2625*0762 10/n/+, 10/n/-, 10/n/nnnn response


4) TC2: --End stop-- *2000 10/n/E response
5) TC2: --Invalid-- 0270 Response when 20 command has been used

Description:
The 10 commands are used to read-out and control the channel number settings of the combiner
sections.

The response contains four fields in each line:

1) The TC section number.


2) The selected channel number.
3) The corresponding frequency in MHz.
4) The corresponding step position of the stepper motor.

The channel number is the physical channel number and is different system channel numbers used in
TETRA and NMT signalling. The star ahead of the last field indicates, that tuning is still in progress and
the final position has not yet been reached. --End stop-- is indicated, when the position is at the
mechanical end stop. --Invalid-- is indicated, when no valid channel number (frequency) is available, e.g
when the 20 command has been used.

The 10/n/+, 10/n/- and 10/n/nnnn commands are used to change the channel numbers.

The 10/n/E command is used to put the combiner into idle position at the mechanical end stop. To
initialize to the end stop, use the 20/n/E command instead.

The 10/n/EE++++ command saves the channel number in EEPROM. This feature is only significant,
when manual operating mode has been selected with the 11 command.

11 OPERATING MODE

11 Display operating mode


11

11- Select manual operating mode


Blocking necessary
Used when the combiner is NOT controlled of the carrier unit.
11-

11+ Select automatic operating mode


Blocking necessary
Used when the combiner is controlled of the carrier unit.
11+

11/EE++++ Save operating mode in EEPROM


Blocking necessary
++++

11/EE....

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 7 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Command description:

Response:
1) Tuning mode: Automatic
2) Tuning mode: Manual

Description:
The 11 commands are used to read-out and control tuning mode of the combiner. When used in a
DAMM base station, automatic mode shall be selected.

In automatic mode, the frequency is controlled of the connected TR411 channel unit. After power-up,
the combiner will stay in idle position until the channel unit sends channel order to the combiner on the
serial interface between each channel unit and the TCC411. The channel unit will continue to update the
channel number each 10 seconds. If the TCC411 has not received update in 20 seconds, it returns the
combiner to idle position (e.g. when a channel unit has been removed). For the functionality in the
channel unit, see the desciption for the TR 30 command.

In manual mode, the channel information from the channel unit is not recognized. After power-up, the
combiner will be set to the channel numbers stored in EEPROM with the 10 commands immediately.

12 TEST POINTS

12 Display all test points


12

12/n Display test point


Combiner number (1..4)

12/.

Command description:

Response: Remark:
1) TC1 TP: 0.31 VDC 12 response
TC2 TP: 0.12 VDC
TC3 TP: 0.48 VDC
TC4 TP: 0.04 VDC
2) TC3 TP: 0.48 VDC 12/n response

Description:
The 12 commands are used to read-out the measurement values on the test points for the reflected
power from the cavity. The same value can be read-out with the 12 command on the TR.

13 FINE ADJUSTMENT

13 Display fine adjustment settings


13

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 8 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

13/n Display fine adjustment setting


Combiner number (1..4)

13/.

13/n/+ Increment fine adjustment setting


Combiner number (1..4)

13/./+

13/n/- Decrement fine adjustment setting


Combiner number (1..4)

13/./-

13/n/snn Change fine adjustment setting


Combiner number (1..4)
Fine adjustment setting (-99..+99)

13/./...

13/n/EE++++ Save fine adjustment setting in EEPROM


Combiner number (1..4)
++++

13/./EE....

Command description:

Response: Remark:
1) TC1 fine adjust: +00 13 response
TC2 fine adjust: +05
TC3 fine adjust: -03
TC4 fine adjust: +02
2) TC2 fine adjust: +05 13/n.. response

Description:
The 13 commands are used to fine adjust the cavities of the combiner. The fine adjustment offsets the
motor positions with the selected number of steps.

The fine adjustment is set to 00, when the combiner is calibrated on the factory and can be changed in
the field, when the center frequencies are not longer accurate. It is normally not necessary to use the fine
adjustment after installation.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 9 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Motor control commands


20 MOTOR CONTROL

20 Display motor positions


20

20/n Display motor position


Combiner number (1..4)

20/.

20/n/+ Step up motor position


Blocking necessary
Combiner number (1..4)

20/./+

20/n/- Step down motor position


Blocking necessary
Combiner number (1..4)

20/./-

20/n/nnnn Change motor position


Blocking necessary
Combiner number (1..4)
Motor position (0000..<end stop>)

20/./....

20/n/++ Forced step up motor position


Steps up one step even if end position was reached
Blocking necessary
Warning: End position shall be initialized afterwards to make the
position valid.
Combiner number (1..4)

20/./++

20/n/E Init to end stop


Blocking necessary
Combiner number (1..4)

20/./E

Command description:

Response: Remark:
1) TC1: Set=0727 Cur=0727 20 response
TC2: Set=2000 Cur=2000
TC3: Set=0747 Cur=0747

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 10 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

TC4: Set=0755 Cur=0755


2) TC4: Set=0755 Cur=0755 20/n.. response
3) TC3: *Set=0425 Cur=0741 20/n.. response, tuning

Description:
The 20 commands are used to control the stepper motors directly during test and calibration.

The response includes the selected set value and the current position. A * ahaed of Set indicates, that
tuning is active.

The 20/n/E command initializes the position to the mechanical end stop by stepping upwards steps
enough to always reach the end position. This command shall be used, if manual turn of a motor has
been made.

The 20/n/++ command steps up the motor position even when the end stop position is reached. The
command is used during factory test to check the end stop calibration. Afterwards an end stop init shall
be made to make the position valid again.

21 MOTOR CONTINUOUS UP/DOWN

21 Display command function


21

21/n/C Motor continuous up/down


Blocking necessary
Switches between End.stop-50 and End.stop-250 continuously
Stops at reception of next character
Combiner number (1..4)

21/./C

Command description:

Response: Remark:
1) Motor Up/Down command 21 response
2) TC2: Motor Up/Down cont. 21/n/C response

Description:
The 21 command is used to activate continuous tuning between to fixed positions.

The function is used during factory test to check to voltage margin of the stepper motor.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 11 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Test commands
Description:

60 Display temperature
60

Command description:
The command displays the actual temperature.

Description:

67 Display TR serial input port levels


67

Command description:
The command displayes the physical input level on the four input pins (PD5..PD2) receiving the channel
number from the transceiver.

The command is used during factory test.

68 INPUT PORT

68 Display input port


68

Command description:

Response: Remark:
1) Input port= bbbbbb b=0: Low
b=1: High

Description:
The command displayes the physical input levels on the parallel input port

1: End Stop 4

2: End Stop 3
3: End Stop 2
4: End Stop 1
5: (spare)
6: (spare)

The command is used during factory test.

NB: The command is only available in software version 2.00 or later.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 12 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

69 READ MEMORY LOCATION

69 Display last selected memory address


69

69/hhhh Display memory address hhhh


Memory address ($0000..$0FFF and $2000..$FFFF)

69/....

Command description:

Response: Remark:
1) $hhhh=$hh Normal response
2) $hhhh=Protected $1000 to $1FFF address response

Description:
The command displays the content of a memory location. The I/O area $1000 to $1FFF is protected in
order not to disturb read handshake on I/O ports.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 13 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Calibration
80 CALIBRATION UNLOCK

80 Display calibration unlock selection


80

80/UNLOCK Unlock for calibration


Blocking necessary
Warning: Execute this command only for a complete recalibration of the
combiner module!!!
UNLOCK

80/......

Command description:

Response:
1) Calibration unlock: Off
2) Calibration unlock: On

Description:
The command is used to unlock for calibration during factory calibration.

Unlocking makes it possible to change the calibration values with the 8x commands. Never unlock for
calibration in the field, as it can be necessary to return the combiner to the factory for calibration, if the
settings are changed!

81 START FREQUENCY

81 Display start frequency


81

81/nnnn Change start frequency


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Start frequency in MHz (e.g. 0935 or 0460)

81/....

Command description:

Response:
1) Start frequency: 460MHz

Description:
The command is used to setup the start frequency (lowest frequency) of the combiner.

The value is used of the 10 command, when the frequency for the selected channel number is displayed.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 14 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

82 CHANNEL SEPARATION

82 Display channel separation


82

82/nn Change channel separation


Blocking and unlocking necessary
12: 12.5 kHz
20: 20 kHz

82/..

Command description:

Response:
1) Channel spacing: 12.5kHz

Description:
The command is used to setup channel spacing of the combiner.

The value is used of the 10 command, when the frequency for the selected channel number is displayed.

83 CALIBRATION CHANNEL SPACING

83 Display calibration channel spacing


83

83/nn Change calibration channel spacing


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Calibration channel spacing (01..99)
NMT450: 26 (10MHz BW, 12.5kHz channel separation)
NMT470: 17 (10MHz BW, 20kHz channel separation)

83/..

Command description:

Response:
1) Cal. channel spacing: 26

Description:
The command is used to setup the number of channels between each calibration point.

Value shall be:


BW 1
--------------- * --
Channel spacing 31

where BW is the highest minus the lowest frequency in Hz, and channel spacing is in Hz as well. If result
is not an integer, next higher value shall be used.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 15 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

The value shall place all the calibration points over the used frequency range.

84 END STOP POSITION

84 Display end stop position


84

84/nnnn Change end stop position


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Note: Value is truncated to modulo 4
Motor end stop position
900MHz: typ. 3500
450MHz: typ. 2000

84/....

Command description:

Response:
1) End stop position: 2000

Description:
The command is used to setup the motor position for the mechanical end stop.

The value shall be setup to a value giving a frequency of the combiner at motor position 0 a few MHz
below the lowest used combiner frequency.

The lowest calibration point shall after calibration then contain a value of around 200..500.

85 CALIBRATION VALUES

85 Display command function


85

85/n Display calibration values


Combiner number (1..4)

85/.

85/n/nn Display calibration value


Combiner number (1..4)
Calibration point number (00..31)

85/./..

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 16 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

85/n/nn/SET Set calibration point to current position


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Combiner number (1..4)
Calibration point number (00..31)

85/./../SET

85/n/nn/nnnn Change calibration point value


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Combiner number (1..4)
Calibration point number (00..31)
Motor position (0..<end stop position>)

85/./../....

Command description:

Response: Remark:
1) Calibration commands 85 response
2) ** TC2 VALUES ** 85/n response
00:0364 16:1001
01:0403 17:1041
02:0443 18:1081
03:0483 19:1121
04:0523 20:1161
05:0563 21:1201
06:0603 22:1241
07:0643 23:1281
08:0682 24:1321
09:0722 25:1361
10:0762 26:1401
11:0802 27:1441
12:0842 28:1481
13:0881 29:1522
14:0921 30:1562
15:0961 31:1603
3) TC2: 0523 85/n/nn response

Description:
The commands are used to display and change the calibration tables for the combiner.

The tables are used to convert from channel number to motor position. There are 32 calibration values
for each combiner section. To get the channel number for a specific calibration point, multiply the
calibration point number with the value entered with the 83 command. For channel numbers between the
calibration points, the TCC411 makes interpolation.

The calibration table compensates for mechanical differencies between the combiner resonators. When
the TCC411 is exchanged, the calibration values can be moved to the new TCC411.

Calibration is normally done with a computer controlled test setup in the factory. If the necessary
measuring equipment is available, calibration can also be done manually.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 17 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

Factory settings
90 BS TYPE

90 Display BS type selection


90

90/c Change BS type selection


Blocking necessary
BS type
A: Analog [TR451]
D: Digital [TR411]

90/.

Command description:

Response:
1) BS type: Analog [BS451]
2) BS type: Digital [BS411]

Description:
The command is used to select the type of Base Station.

When Analog is selected, the O&M serial interface is always addressed and the serial speed to TR451
is 150 bit/sec.

When Digital is selected, the O&M serial interface is addressed with the "Anc"-command and the serial
speed to TR411 is 200 bit/sec.

91 THERMOMETER SETTING

91 Display Thermometer setting


91

91/snn Change Thermometer setting


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Thermometer setting (-29..+29)

91/...

Command description:

Response:
1) Thermometer setting= snn

Description:
The command is used to calibrate the Thermometer.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 18 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

95 TYPE NUMBER

95 Display Item number


95

95/ccc..c Change Item number


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Item number

95/............

Command description:

Response:
1) Item no.: cccccccccccc

Description:
The commands are used to enter and display the item number.

The item number can consist of from 1 to 12 ASCII characters and shall be setup to be equal to the type
number on the type plate.

96 TYPE NUMBER

96 Display Type number


96

96/ccc..c Change Type number


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Type number

96/............

Command description:

Response:
1) Type no.: cccccccccccc

Description:
The commands are used to enter and display the type number.

The type number can consist of from 1 to 12 ASCII characters and shall be setup to be equal to the type
number on the type plate.

97 SERIAL NUMBER

97 Display Serial number


97

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 19 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

97/nnnnnn Change 6-digit serial number


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Serial number (000000..999999)

97/......

97/nnnnnnnn Change 8-digit serial number


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Serial number (00000000..99999999)

97/........

Command description:

Response:
1) Serial no.: nnnnnnnn

Description:
The commands are used to enter and display the serial number.

The serial number shall consist of 8 digits and shall be setup to be equal to the serial number on the type
plate.

98 VERSION NUMBER

98 Display Version number


98

98/cc..c Change Version number


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Version number

98/......

Command description:

Response:
1) Version no.: cccccc

Description:
The commands are used to enter and display the version number.

The version number can consist of from 1 to 6 ASCII characters and shall be setup to be equal to the
version number on the type plate.

99 REVISION NUMBER

99 Display Revision number


99

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 20 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2007-03-10
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark TCC411 TX Combiner Controller ver. 2.00 help

99/cc..c Change Revision number


Blocking and unlocking necessary
Revision number

99/......

Command description:

Response:
1) Revision no.: cccccc

Description:
The commands are used to enter and display the revision number.

The revision number can consist of from 1 to 6 ASCII characters and shall be setup to be equal to the
revision number on the type plate.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 21 of 21


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

OM program help

OM
About the main window

The main window is a little window containing 5 big buttons, a connection-button and a menu.

The 5 big buttons control the visabillity of 5 windows: The terminal window, the device window, the
editor window, the fileview window and the help window. You can find help for these windows in the
main menu of this help file.

The menu

Logging menu

The "Logging" menu will open a logging window, where you can select a file to save the log-text to. You
can type in a filename or browse to one.

After selecting what to save in your log-file, you can either choose to append text to the file or create,
(and thereby emptying), the file.

After the logging is started you can close the window and then later return to stop the logging with the
"Stop logging" button, and start a new logging in another file.

You can also control the logging from the command line. Look for the !LOG commands for a
description of how to do that.

Options menu

The Options-window gives you the possibility to set these options:

1. Should commands and responses from your current device be shown in the terminal window.

2. Should commands and responses from your scripts be shown in the terminal window.

3. What should the timeout and line-delay values be.

4. How many characters should the terminal window hold, and what character size should be used.

5. What system should be used.

About menu

In the about window there is a copyright message and other information about the OM program.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 1 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

The connection button

At the bottom of the main window, is the "connection button". If you are not connected it will state: "No
connection". By pressing the button you will get a "Connection list" window. Here you can specify how
the OM should connect to your equipment.

You can specify that the OM should connect through a RS232 cable, or via a LAN.

After typing in the connection information, you can choose the line in the list and press the "connect"
button. The OM will then try to connect. After a succesful connection, the "Connection list" window will
close, the terminal window will open, and you will be able to see the connection made in the caption of
the "connection button"

After a connection through a RS232 cable via COM1 at speed 9600 Baud to a connection you have
specified as a "Base station" -connection, the button will read: Direct connection: Base station ->
COM1 9600

About the terminal

Terminal commands

Commands typed in the terminal window are usually send directly to the device you are connected to.
Some commands however, are interpreted by the OM. Most of these commands start with a "!" sign,
except the "C/" and the "R/" commands, which continue or repeats to execute the same line, with or
without scrolling the screen.

The terminal comes in handy whenever you need a fast answer. For instance: most devices will respond
with name and version when the 00 command is send

The repeat command (R/ or R|) is often used when you need to see a change in the respone from your
device. If you know a sertain command will output a different result when a sertain event happens you
can issue the repeat command and wait for the response to change.

With the mouse you can mark areas of the terminal. By either using the edit menu at the top of the
terminal, or the popupmenu (right mouse-button click), you can copy the marked text.

The terminal menus

Menu: Edit

In the Edit-menu you will find menues for copying and pasting text, for makeing a print of the terminal,
and a menu for saveing the terminal-text to a file.

By right-clicking the mouse in the terminal, you get the edit menu, as a popup- menu

Menu: Scripts

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 2 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

The Scripts-menu has a sub-menu called "Local scripts", this menu holds all the script-files found. If you
saved your scripts in a directory, that is not your current directory, you can use the "Locate scripts...", to
change directory.

With the "Run disk-file" menu, you can locate a file to run as a script.

The "New script..." will open up the editor, and let you type in a new script.

The "Options...", will show the Options-window with the Script-page selected.

Menu: Terminal

The "Options...", will show the Options-window with the Terminal-page selected.

About the device

In the Device form, you can get an overview of sertain parts of your equipment presented in a graphical
way. For instance you can look at a line unit, reading the states of it's test-points and viewing settings.
Most presentations have popup-menus, that enable the user to select settings. For instance you can click
a test-point and a popupmenu will apear giving you the chance to select between viewing the result in
either volt or dBm.

In the statusline of the device form, you can see the device you are looking at, a led indicating the status,
and the result of a 00 command.

The device menu lets you print a "screen-dump" of the device, and open the Options window, with the
Device page selected.

After selecting a device, an updating loop is started. To stop the updating and return to the "No device",
use the Stop button.

About the editor

The editor can be used to edit and run scripts. It can also be used as a simple text editor.

The editor has functions that let you:

x) cut, copy and paste text.


x) make a search and a search/replace.
x) print the text.

About the fileview

The fileviewer let you quickly open up readable files for examination. Further more you can use it to
track changes of files. You can for instance open up a log file, and let the fileviewer watch for changes.
Whenever a new line is added to the log file the fileviewer will automatically load the line and insert it
into the fileviewer.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 3 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

You can put files in a list, which will be saved in the settings file of the OM.

If a file is not in the list it is possible to browse your drives for the file. The browsed files will be put in
"Files / Browsed" menu. The next time you want to view the same file you can select it in "Files /
Browsed" menu.

With the "Edit / Edit browsed / Add item to list..." you can put browsed files into the "listed files"-list.

The menu will let you open up another fileviewer, print the text, and save it into another file.

In the statusline you can see if tracking is turned on or off, how large the file is, the files date and time
settings, and the filename.

About the help

The help contains 3 levels of information. When you first display the help form, you will see a list of help
files - this is the first level. Next level is a list of either commands or help-texts. You reach this level by
choosing a help file, and pressing either enter or double-clicking it with the mouse. The last level is a
command description or the help-text.

You can step through the help by using either:

1) the mouse and the buttons: "Back" and "Description". 2) the arrow buttons, the enter and the escape
key.

The enter key is the same as a mouse double-click, the escape key is the same as the Back button.

On some commands or texts you can get a description. For instance, you can get a "Address
selection"-description. If there is a such description for a given command, the Description button will be
enabled. You can view the description by clicking the Description button or pressing Alt-D.

When you reach the command-level, the Execute button will be enabled, and if any parameters are
allowed you can insert these and execute the command.

In the status line you can see where you are in the help, and where the output from an execute will go to.
If the status line states: Output=Terminal, then the commands you choose to execute will be send to your
device attached and the command and the result from the command will be showed in the terminal. If
the status line states: Output=Editor, then the command will be send to the editor as a text string.
This is very handy when you write scripts. If you dont remember a sertain command, you can press F1
to open the help. Then you find the command in the help, write in any parameters and press enter. The
help window will then be closed, and the editor window will be shown. The command has now been
inserted at the position where you choosed to open the help.

In the menu: Output you can select where the output should go to. When writing scripts, that means you
can open the help with F1, select Terminal as output and try the command. If the result is OK, you open
the help again (F1), select Editor as output and press enter to insert the command into the editors text.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 4 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

TetraOM command line parameters

You can call the program with these 3 parameters:

/CONFIGPATH=path
/HELPPATH=path
/STARTUPPATH=path

CONFIGPATH

With /CONFIGPATH you tell the program where to look after the settings.wom file which contains the
programs settings.

F.x.: /CONFIGPATH=c:\TetraOM\Settings\Admin

HELPPATH

With /HELPPATH you tell the program where to look after the help files.

F.x.: /HELPPATH=c:\TetraOM\HelpFiles

STARTUPPATH

With /STARTUPPATH you can make the program change directory.

F.x.: /STARTUPPATH=c:\MyWorkingDir

You can use 1,2 or all of the parameters here, but you dont have to use any of the parameters listed here
to make the program run proberly. If no parameters are given to the program, it will simply try to find the
configuration file and the help files in the directory where the exe-file is located.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 5 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Commands
C/... Continuous command
Command send continuously until any key is pressed
Screen is scrolled
Command send continuously

C/............................................................

R/... Repeat command


Command repeated until any key is pressed
Screen is not scrolled
Command to repeat

R/............................................................

!WAIT(hh:mm) Wait until a specific time


Hour (00..23)
Minute (00..59)

!WAIT(..:..)

!DELAY(delay) Insert a delay, in steps of 1/10 of a second


Delay-time in steps of 1/10 of a second

!DELAY(.....)

!KEY Wait for keypress.


!KEY

!ECHO(comments) Comments to be displayed with highlighted text.


Comments to be highlighted

!ECHO(.............................................................)

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 6 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Logging
!LOG Show logging settings
!LOG

!LOG(c,r,a,filename) Open or create logfile.


Terminal command logging ('Y','N')
Terminal response logging ('Y','N')
Append to existing file ('Y','N')
name of logfile. May include complete path.

!LOG(.,.,.,........................................)

!LOG(CREATE,filename) Create and open logfile. Empty if already exists.


Name of logfile. May include complete path.

!LOG(CREATE,..............................)

!LOG(OPEN,filename) Open logfile. Append if exists.


Name of logfile. May include complete path.

!LOG(OPEN,..............................)

!LOG(CLOSE) Close logfile


!LOG(CLOSE)

!LOG(SET,t,t,s,s,d,d) Enable/disable command/response logging


Terminal command logging ('Y','N')
Terminal response logging ('Y','N')
Script command logging ('Y','N')
Script response logging ('Y','N')
Device command logging ('Y','N')
Device response logging ('Y','N')

!LOG(SET,.,.,.,.,.,.)

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 7 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Options
!OPT Show options settings
!OPT

!OPT(TIMEOUT,seconds) Set timeout in seconds


Timeout in seconds

!OPT(TIMEOUT,..)

!OPT(LINEDELAY,ms) Set linedelay in milliseconds


Linedelay in milliseconds (0..9999)

!OPT(LINEDELAY,....)

!OPT(ECHO,s,s,d,d) Enable/disable echoing in terminal


Echo script commands ('Y','N')
Echo script responses ('Y','N')
Echo device commands ('Y','N')
Echo device responses ('Y','N')

!LOG(ECHO,.,.,.,.)

!OPT(TERMWIN,xxx,yyy) Set terminal window size


X-size (80..160)
Y-size (25..100)

!OPT(TERMWIN,...,...)

!OPT(TERMFONTSIZE,s) Set terminal font size


Size of font (0..4)

!OPT(TERMFONTSIZE,.)

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 8 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Connections
!CONN Show number of items in connection list
!CONN

!CONN(D,co,ba,a,n) Direct
COM port (1..18)
Baud speed (03,06,12,24,48,96,19,38,57,11)
Send A900+ ('Y','N')
Name of connection

!CONN(D,..,..,.,..............................)

!CONN(M,co,ba,a,n) Direct modem


COM port (1..18)
Baud speed (03,06,12,24,48,96,19,38,57,11)
Send A900+ ('Y','N')
Name of connection

!CONN(M,..,..,.,..............................)

!CONN(U,co,ba,ph,da,dti,rw,ati,a,n) Dialup modem


COM port (1..18)
Baud speed (03,06,12,24,48,96,19,38,57,11)
Phonenumber
Dial attempts
Dial timeout
Retry wait
Answer timeout
Send A900+ ('Y','N')
Name of connection

!CONN(U,..,..,....................,..,...,..,...,.,.....................)

!CONN(N,ip,a,n) Network
IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
Send A900+ ('Y','N')
Name of connection

!CONN(N,...............,.,..............................)

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 9 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Connect
!CONNECT(xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) Connects to a new BSC
IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

!CONNECT(...............)

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 10 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Disconnect
!DISCONNECT Disconnects from the current BSC
!DISCONNECT

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 11 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Fileview settings
!FILEVIEW Show number of items in the file view list
!FILEVIEW

!FILEVIEW(name,teof,file) Insert item in file view list


Name (fx.: Config)
Track End-Of-File ('Y','N')
Filename (fx.: c:\config.sys)

!FILEVIEW(....................,.,................................)

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 12 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Editor commands

EDITING COMMANDS

The editing commands supported by the editor are arranged by category in the list below. In each case
the first column give a brief description of the command. The following column descripes the key(s) to
wich a command is assigned.

CURSER MOVEMENT:

Curser left one character <Left>


Curser right one character <Right>
Curser up one line <Up>
Curser Down one line <Down>
Curser left one word <Ctrl+Left>
Curser right one word <Ctrl+Right>
Curser to begining of line <Home>
Curser to end of line <End>
Curser to top of edit window <Ctrl+PageUp>
Curser to end of edit window <Ctrl+PageDown>
Curser to beginning of file <Ctrl+Home>
Curser to end of file <Ctrl+End>
Scroll display one page up <PageUp>
Scroll display one page down <PageDown>

INSERTION AND DELETION:

Delete character at cursor <Del>


Delete character to left of cursor <Bksp>
Start a new line <Enter>

BLOCK COMMANDS:

Mark <Shift> + cursor


movement
Unmark cursor movement
Copy marked block to clipboard <Ctrl+C>
Cut marked block to clipboard <Ctrl+X>
Insert block from clipboard <Ctrl+V>
Delete marked block <Del>

SEARCH AND REPLACE:

Search <Alt+S>+<F>
Search and replace <Alt+S>+<R>

MODE TOGGLES:

Toggle insert mode <Ins>


Toggle Upper/Lower case <Caps Lock>

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 13 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

UNDO:

Undo <Ctrl-Z>

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 14 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

SET command

:SET(var,value) Set variable value


Name of variable
Value

:SET(........,...........)

Command description:
The SET command creates variables in a seperate array. You can only use the variables in scripts. The
variables can have the same names as variables used in the ':FOR' / ':NEXT' commands.

The SET-variables are case sensitive, this means that 'thisvar' and 'ThisVar' are two different variables.

You can use hexadecimal numbers by inserting a '$' in front of the value.

Creating variables: x) :SET(y,1) - y with a value of 1 x) :SET(y,$A) - y with a value of 10 x) :SET


(y,=2) - y with a value of 2 x) :SET(y,=$AA) - y with a value of 170

You can change the value of the variables using the '+','-' and '=' signs in a :SET-command.

x) :SET(y,+10) - add 10 to the value of y. x) :SET(y,-$10) - subtract 16 from the value of y. x) :SET
(y,=10) - set y-varaible to 10.

You use variables by inserting them in a pair of '%'-signs:

:SET(x,=10) %x%

the output of the second line is '10'. If the output should be hexadecimal you can insert a '$'. 1%$x%
will output: '1A'.

You can left pad. 1%$x,3% will output: '100A'.

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 15 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

For - Next Loops


:FOR(var,start,end) Define the start of a FOR/NEXT loop.
Name of counter variable
Start value
End value

:FOR(........,.....,.....)

:FOR(var,start,end,stepsize) Define the start of a FOR/NEXT loop.


Name of counter variable
Start value
End value
Steps for counting from <Start> to <End>

:FOR(........,.....,.....,.....)

:NEXT(var) Repeat or end last defined FOR loop


Name of counter variable

:NEXT(........)

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 16 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Labels, jumps, conditional jumps.


:LABEL(labelname) Set destination of jumps.
Name of label

:LABEL(........)

:GOTO(labelname) Continue processing at a label.


Name of label to jump to.

:GOTO(........)

:IFNORESP(nextlabel) Jump, if no response on communication-port.


Label to continue at, if a "NO xx RESPONSE" was received on the
communication port.

:IFNORESP(........)

:IFTIMEOUT(nextlabel) Jump, if general fault, on communication-port.


Label to continue at, if a timeout, or out fatal error
occoured on the communication port.

:IFTIMEOUT(.........)

:IFINVALID(nextlabel) Jump, if reponse contained 'INVALID'


Label to continue at, if the last received string contained
the substring 'INVALID'.

:IFINVALID(.........)

:IFEOD(nextlabel) Jump, if end of data-marker was read.


Label to continue at, if the first three characters in the last
received response on the communication-port, was "***".

:IFEOD(........)

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 17 of 18


Doc. No. Rev. Date

2001-08-20
Description
Damm Cellular Systems A/S, Denmark OM program help

Special commands
:TIMEOUT(time) Setup timeout time on RS232 port
Timeout in seconds.

:TIMEOUT(..)

:EXECUTE(filename) Send file to port.


Name of file to send to port, line by line.

:EXECUTE(..........................)

:INCLUDE(filename) Include file into command-list.


Name of file to include in command-list. All command will be
interpreted as if they where located within the editor.

:INCLUDE(.........................)

:SEND(....) Send command containing variables.


Commands to send. Variables from :FOR-statements must be specified
as %Name,Length% where Name is the variable identifier, and Length
is the lenght of the desired string, to be padded with leading zeros

:SEND(...................................................)

<cmd> Send command


Command to send.
Optional remarks can be entered
after a ";"

................................... ; .........................

Licensed user: Damm Cellular Systems A/S Page 18 of 18

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen